JP6721270B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachinko machine”) or a multi-function machine (generally referred to as “parrot machine”) in which a pachinko machine and a rotating body type gaming machine are fused. It is a thing.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is a container-shaped ball tank capable of storing a game medium supplied from an island facility of a game hall where the game machine is installed, and a payout device for paying out the game medium stored in the ball tank. It has and. The ball tank is attached to an upper part of a main body frame that is openably and closably attached to a frame-shaped outer frame attached to the island facility (for example, Patent Document 1).

In the technique of Patent Document 1, a notch is formed in the front wall of the ball tank, and an escape recess communicating with the notch is formed in the upper portion of the main body frame. With this, when the number of game media stored in the ball tank increases too much, the game media are allowed to escape through the notches into the recess, thereby increasing the downward pressure (ball pressure) by the plurality of game media. By reducing the amount, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the ball tank.

However, in the conventional game machine as in Patent Document 1, when many game media escape to the recess side, the game media in the ball tank are strongly pushed backward by the many game media that escape to the recess side. Therefore, the pressure may cause ball clogging in the ball tank.

JP2012-55725A

Therefore, in view of the above situation, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing clogging of a gaming medium in a ball tank that stores the gaming medium supplied from the island facility. ..

The present invention is
A storage part, which is provided in the upper part on the back side of the game machine and has a storage area capable of storing the game balls supplied from the island facility,
A tank rail part capable of guiding the game balls stored in the storage area to the rear side of the game machine from the storage area and guiding the ball to the downstream side,
In a gaming machine equipped with
A partition wall partitioning the upper opening of the storage region,
A non-reservoir region portion formed outside the upper opening partitioned by the partition wall portion;
Prepare,
A specific inclined surface that can guide the game ball toward the tank rail portion side is formed in the non-reservation area portion so that the game ball located in the non-reservation area portion can flow into the tank rail portion due to a predetermined event. Ri name is,
The specific inclined surface has a surface inclined downward from the front side to the rear side of the game machine over a predetermined left and right width, and all of the game balls located in the non-storage area part are the tank rail parts. It is characterized in that it can be guided to the side .
Further, the following means will be disclosed as a separate invention from the present invention.
Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"A frame-shaped outer frame that can be attached to island equipment,
A main body frame attached to the outer frame so as to be hinge-rotatably attached, and to which a game board having a game area in which a game is played by hitting a game medium is attached,
A ball tank which is provided in the upper part of the main body frame and has a container shape in which the upper side is opened and which can store the game medium supplied from the island facility,
A tank rail provided in the main body frame, in which the game media stored in the ball tank are aligned and circulated to the downstream side, and the upper side from the middle to the downstream end in the flow direction of the game medium is closed. When,
A payout device provided on the main frame at a position lower than the tank rail, for paying out the game medium guided by the tank rail,
It is provided on the front side of the ball tank in the main body frame, extends in the front-rear direction, and one side in the left-right direction extends outwardly from the ball tank, and the game medium overflowing forward from the ball tank is the ball. An overflow surface part that is inclined so that the front end side becomes higher to return to the tank,
The rear end of the overflow surface portion extends rearward from one outer side portion in the left-right direction of the ball tank to a portion where the upper side of the tank rail is opened, and is inclined so that the rear end side becomes lower. And a detour passage through which the game medium overflowing from the ball tank to the overflow surface portion can be guided.”

Here, "game" means "entering a game medium aiming at a specific entrance for which a special lottery is conducted to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, and the game medium to the specific entrance is When a special lottery result in which an advantageous game state occurs due to acceptance is drawn, a specific inlet for paying out a predetermined number of game media is opened by accepting the game medium, so that the game medium is aimed at the specific inlet. "Entering a game", "Entering a game medium aiming at a reception point to which a privilege including a payout of the game medium is given", "A plurality of symbols each provided with a plurality of symbols after inserting the game medium After the variable display (for example, rotation) of the symbol row (for example, the rotating body) is changed, the variable display of each symbol row is stopped so that the combination of the symbols to which the privilege including the payout of the game medium is given is provided." , And the like.

In addition, as a “game area” in which a game is played, “a game medium is driven by a player's operation, and a plurality of entrances are provided to which a privilege including a payout of the game medium is given according to acceptance of the game medium. "Are you playing", "Each has a plurality of symbols, each of which is variably displayed by the player's start operation triggered by the insertion of the game medium, and the combination of each symbol stopped by the player's stop operation. "A region in which a plurality of symbol rows (for example, a rotating body) to which a privilege including a payout of a game medium is provided is arranged."

Further, the "main body frame" may be any one to which a game board having a game area is attached, such as "a box-shaped body with an open front side" and "a frame-shaped body". Things”, and the like. Also, "hinge rotatable" means that the outer frame is rotatably attached to a front end on one side of the left and right sides of the outer frame around an axis extending vertically so as to open forward.

Further, as the "ball tank", "a tank having an overflow portion which is cut out from above at least a part of the front wall and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge", "outer peripheral upper edge" Having a constant height." and the like.

Also, as "tank rails", "one that aligns the game media in one row", "one that aligns the game media in two rows in the front-rear direction", "communication with one side of the ball tank in the left-right direction" And the downstream side extends in the left-right direction away from the ball tank.”, “The downstream side extends in the left-right direction so as to communicate with the bottom surface of the ball tank, and moves away from the ball tank”. It is in communication with the rear wall of the ball tank, and the downstream side extends in the left-right direction away from the ball tank." "At least at the bottom, it extends from near the upstream to the downstream end, and is orthogonal to the flow direction of the game medium. Having a gutter-shaped main guiding portion formed so that only one game medium can be distributed in the width direction, ""a width direction that is orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game medium in the portion where the upper side is open To have a bulging portion that is bulged so that a plurality of game media are arranged side by side, "at least in the region where the upper side is closed, the height of the flow path through which the game medium circulates is the downstream end. It is formed so as to become lower as it goes toward "."

Further, as the "overflow surface part", "the front-rear direction extends from the front end of the ball tank to the vicinity of the front end of the body frame", "the left-right direction of the part in front of the ball tank is the left-right direction of the ball tank" "Extending shorter than the length of the ball tank," "the left and right direction of the part in front of the ball tank extending the same length as the left and right direction of the ball tank," "outward in the left and right direction than the ball tank The part that extends to the middle of the left and right ends of the main body frame", "The part that extends outward in the left and right direction from the ball tank to the left and right ends of the main frame. "Extended", "the difference in height between the front end and the rear end is smaller than the outer diameter of the game medium", and the like.

In addition, the "detour passage" has "a passage surface on which a game medium rolls and a weir portion that extends upward from an end of the passage surface on the opposite side of the ball tank." , "Things that are inclined so that the side of the passage surface on which the game medium rolls away from the ball tank in the left-right direction is lowered".

By the way, in an island facility to which a game machine is attached, a supply device for supplying a game medium to a ball tank provided in a main body frame is provided (for example, JP 2012-110502 A). This supply device has a cylindrical or gutter-shaped supply member in which a game medium is circulated and a base end side is rotatably supported around an axis extending left and right, and a front end side is open, and a front end side of the supply member. An urging member that urges in a direction of moving upward and an operating rod that extends downward from the lower end side of the supply member so as to be able to contact the ball tank are provided. This supply device is a gaming machine attached to an island facility, and in a state where the main body frame is opened forward with respect to the outer frame, the front end side of the supply member is above the ball tank by the urging force of the urging member. When the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame, the lever that is in contact with the rear wall of the ball tank is pushed rearward so that the biasing member is biased. The supply member is rotated in the direction in which the front end side moves downward against the force, and the front end is in a state of being inserted into the inside of the ball tank. Therefore, in such a supply device, the game medium is supplied into the ball tank from the rear to the front through the supply member of the supply device of the island facility.

On the other hand, in the conventional game machine as disclosed in Patent Document 1, the game medium is further supplied from the above supply device in a state where the escape recess provided in front of the ball tank is filled with the game medium. Then, the game medium in the escape recess is overcome to escape further forward, but in the technique of Patent Document 1, the front side of the escape recess is formed into a flat surface that extends to the left and right, and therefore passes through the flat surface. As a result, the game medium may spill outside the ball tank, that is, outside the main frame. If the game medium spilled on the outside of the main body frame invades between the main body frame and the outer frame, the main body frame may not be able to be normally opened and closed.

According to the configuration of the means 1, the game machine is provided with a frame-shaped outer frame that is attached to the island facility, and a hinge-rotatably attached to the outer frame, and a game area in which the game is played by driving the game medium. A body frame to which the game board is attached, and a ball tank that is provided in the upper part of the body frame and has a container shape that is open on the upper side and that can store the game medium supplied from the island equipment, and a ball tank In addition to aligning the game media that are being circulated to the downstream side, the upper side from the middle of the circulation direction of the game media to the downstream end is closed, and the tank rail provided in the main frame and the tank rail It is provided on the main body frame at a lower position, and is provided on the front side of the ball tank in the main body frame, and a payout device for paying out the game medium guided by the tank rail, and extends in the front-rear direction and in the left-right direction. One side extends outward from the ball tank, and the front end side is inclined so that the front end side is high to return the game medium overflowing forward from the ball tank to the ball tank, and the rear end of the overflow surface part. At the outer side of the ball tank in one of the left and right directions from the ball tank to the part where the upper side of the tank rail is open, the rear end is inclined so that it is lower, And a bypass passage through which an overflowing game medium can be guided.

As a result, in the front of the ball tank in the main body frame, since the overflow surface is inclined so that the front end side becomes higher, the game medium supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank rolls forward of the ball tank. However, it can be returned to the inside of the ball tank by the inclination of the overflow surface. Further, since the overflow tank is provided in front of the ball tank, the game medium overflowing from the ball tank can be escaped to the overflow tank. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game medium from further increasing in the ball tank, it is possible to prevent the game media from strongly pressing each other in the ball tank (increase in ball pressure), and In, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball damage) due to the meshing of the game media.

Further, as described above, the game medium overflowing from the ball tank can be escaped to the overflow surface portion, and the game medium on the overflow surface portion can be returned to the ball tank side, so that the game medium can also be discharged on the overflow surface portion. It can be stored, and more game media can be stored together with the ball tank.

Further, since the bypass passage is provided, it is possible to send the game medium overflowing from the ball tank to the overflow rail to the tank rail via the bypass passage. It is possible to avoid a strong pressing force to the rear of the game medium, and it is possible to prevent clogging of the game medium in the ball tank. Further, since the game medium can be sent to the tank rail through the bypass passage, it is possible to prevent the game medium overflowing from the ball tank or the overflow surface portion from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game medium spilled outside the main body frame is sandwiched between the outer frame and the main body frame and the main body frame cannot be opened and closed.

Further, since the bypass passage is provided, it is possible to store the game medium even in the bypass passage, so that more game media can be stored by the ball tank, the overflow surface portion, and the bypass passage. ..

It is desirable that the tank rail extends to one side in the left-right direction such that the tank rail is away from the ball tank, and that the bypass passage is inclined so that the side away from the ball tank in the left-right direction becomes lower. As a result, the game medium overflowing from the ball tank via the overflow surface portion can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail by the bypass passage, so the flow (pressure) by the game medium sent to the tank rail by the bypass passage. Can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail, and it is possible to prevent the game media from being pressed against each other in the tank rail and prevent the game media from being jammed.

Further, the front wall of the tank may have an overflow portion notched from above to the same height as the rear end of the overflow surface portion and formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. As a result, the ball tank has an overflow portion that is notched from above and is formed at the same height as the rear end of the overflow surface portion at the upper edge of the front wall of the outer peripheral upper edge. Therefore, when the amount of game media stored in the ball tank increases as it is supplied from the island equipment, first of all, the ball is passed over the overflow part with the lowest height of the outer peripheral upper edge. It will flow out of the tank. Since the overflow surface portion is provided on the outside of the overflow portion of the ball tank, that is, in the front, the game medium overflowing from the ball tank can be reliably released to the overflow surface portion side, and the above-described operational effects are achieved. be able to.

Further, when the front wall of the ball tank has an overflow portion as described above, the height of the upper end edge other than the overflow portion at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank is made higher than that of the overflow portion. Therefore, the upper edge of the side wall on one side in the left-right direction in the ball tank between the ball tank and the bypass passage is higher than the overflow end, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface part. As a result, the game medium flowing from the ball tank over the overflow part to the overflow surface part and flowing from the overflow surface part to the detour passage is blocked by the side wall on one side of the ball tank, thereby making a detour. It is possible to prevent returning from the passage to the ball tank side, and to prevent the game medium on the bypass passage side from pressing the game medium on the ball tank side to cause clogging of the game medium in the ball tank. You can

Furthermore, when the front wall of the ball tank is provided with the overflow portion as described above, as described above, the upper edge of the side wall between the ball tank and the bypass passage is located at the rear end of the overflow surface portion (the bypass passage). Since the game medium in the passage is higher than the rolling passage surface), it is possible to prevent the game medium from overflowing from the ball tank to the bypass passage without passing through the overflow surface portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game medium from the side (ball tank) to the bypass passage, so that the flow of the game medium in the bypass passage from the overflow surface portion on the front end side to the tank rail on the rear end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward which the pressure of the game medium guided from the bypass passage to the tank rail can be fixed. Therefore, in the tank rail, it is possible to prevent the game media from being pressed against each other to be bitten by the pressure directions applied to the game media being different, and it is possible to prevent clogging of the game media. it can.

When the front wall of the ball tank has an overflow portion as described above, the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion is higher than that of the overflow portion at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game medium supplied to the ball tank from spilling outside from the portion other than the overflow portion, and the game medium spilling outside the main frame is between the outer frame and the main frame. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem in which the main body frame cannot be opened and closed due to being sandwiched between.

Further, on both sides in the left-right direction of the bypass passage in the main body frame, on the side opposite to the ball tank, the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game medium, and the height of the bottom surface is open on the upper side of the tank rail. You may make it further provide the discharge part lower than a site|part. Thus, if for some reason a game medium that spills to the outside of the bypass passage through the overflow surface portion is spilled, the game medium can be received by the discharge portion provided outside the bypass passage. Since the bottom surface of this discharge portion is formed lower than the portion of the tank rail where the upper side is open, the received game medium is not sent into the tank rail, and the game medium spilled from the bypass passage As a result, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being clogged in the tank rail.

In addition, a gutter-shaped main guide portion that extends from near the upstream to the downstream end at least at the bottom of the tank rail and is formed so that only one game medium can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game medium. , A bulging portion that is formed above the main guiding portion and that is open on the upper side, and that bulges wider than the width of the main guiding portion so that a plurality of game media are arranged in the width direction. You can As a result, since the bottom portion of the tank rail is provided with the main guiding portion extending to the downstream end, the game medium in the tank rail reaches the main guiding portion, so that the game medium is lined up in a line. The game media in the tank rail can be aligned, and the game media can be reliably guided to the payout device on the downstream side. Further, in this case, since a wide bulging portion capable of arranging a plurality of game media is provided in the region where the upper side is opened, the game media discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage are surely provided. Therefore, it is possible to receive the above-mentioned action and effect. Further, in this case, since the tank rail is provided with the wide bulging portion, the volume in the tank rail can be increased, so that the storage amount of the game medium in the tank rail can be further increased.

Further, when the tank rail has the main guiding portion and the bulging portion as described above, the bulging portion is made to extend from the upstream end to a site where the upper side is closed, and the upstream end to the downstream side. It is desirable that the width direction becomes narrower toward the side and the width is changed so as to match the width of the main guiding portion. As a result, the plurality of game media are aligned in the bulging portion so that they are aligned in a row in the width direction toward the downstream side, and the plurality of game media are aligned on the downstream side (payout). Device).

In addition, at least the upper side of the tank rail may be closed so that the height of the flow path through which the game medium flows becomes lower toward the downstream end. As a result, the plurality of game media stacked in the height direction on the upstream side (ball tank side) are circulated to the downstream side through the site where the upper side of the tank rail is closed, thereby increasing the height. The number of stages in the direction can be reduced and aligned, and the plurality of game media can be guided to the downstream side (dispensing device side) in an aligned state.

Further, a plurality of electric wire connecting terminals, which are provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion on the outer side in the left-right direction of the ball tank at the upper part of the main body frame, and are capable of connecting electric wiring from the rear, and a plurality of electric wire connecting terminals. A terminal cover that covers the upper side of the terminal and extends horizontally at a position where the upper surface is higher than the overflow surface portion. As a result, a plurality of electric wire connection terminals to which electric wiring is connected are directed rearward, and the upper side of them is covered with a terminal cover, so when a ball tank is supplied from an island facility, the game spilled from the ball tank. It is possible to make it difficult for the medium to come into contact with the electric wire connection terminal, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as short-circuiting due to contact with the game medium and disconnection of the electric wiring. Also, in this case, since the upper surface of the terminal cover is higher than the overflow surface, even if the game medium supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank bounces on the ball tank or the overflow surface, the upper surface of the terminal cover It can be hard to ride. In addition, since the upper surface of the terminal cover extends horizontally, even if the game medium supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover, the game medium is provided with the wire connection terminals. It is possible to make it difficult for the game medium dropped from the upper side of the terminal cover to come into contact with the wire connection terminal and prevent a problem from occurring.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The tank rail is
The downstream side extends to one side in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank,
The bypass passage is
It is inclined so that the side away from the ball tank in the left-right direction becomes lower”.

According to the configuration of the means 2, the tank rail extends to the one side in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank, and the bypass passage is inclined so that the side that is away from the ball tank in the left-right direction becomes lower. It was done.

As a result, the game medium overflowing from the ball tank via the overflow surface portion can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail by the bypass passage, and the game medium from a certain position along the side away from the ball tank. Since it can be sent to the tank rail, the flow (pressure) by the game medium sent to the tank rail by the bypass passage can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail, and the game media strongly press each other in the tank rail. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging of the game medium.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The ball tank is
The front wall has an overflow portion that is cut out from above to the same height as the rear end of the overflow surface portion and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge".

Here, as the "overflow part", "a part that extends in the left-right direction from the end of the bypass wall side of the front wall that extends to the left and right to the end of the overflow surface part in the opposite direction", "the front of the front wall" In the part where the overflow surface part extends, the part that extends in the left-right direction shorter than the overflow surface part", "the part that extends in the left-right direction over the entire length of the front wall", and the like.

According to the structure of the means 3, the ball tank is provided with the overflow portion which is cut out from above in the front wall to the same height as the rear end of the overflow surface portion and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge.

As a result, the ball tank is provided with an overflow portion, which is notched from above and is formed at the same height as the rear end of the overflow surface portion on the upper edge of the front wall of the outer peripheral upper edge and is cut out from above. Therefore, when the amount of game media stored in the ball tank increases as it is supplied from the island equipment, first of all, the ball tank is passed over the lowest overflow portion of the outer peripheral upper edge. Will flow out of the. Since the overflow surface portion is provided on the outside of the overflow portion of the ball tank, that is, in the front, the game medium overflowing from the ball tank can be reliably released to the overflow surface portion side, and the above-described operational effects are achieved. be able to.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge other than the overflow portion is higher than that of the overflow portion at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank, the horizontal direction in the ball tank between the ball tank and the bypass passage is increased. The upper edge of the one side wall is higher than the rear end of the overflow portion, that is, the overflow surface portion. As a result, the game medium flowing from the ball tank over the overflow part to the overflow surface part and flowing from the overflow surface part to the detour passage is blocked by the side wall on one side of the ball tank, thereby making a detour. It is possible to prevent returning from the passage to the ball tank side, and to prevent the game medium on the bypass passage side from pressing the game medium on the ball tank side to cause clogging of the game medium in the ball tank. You can

Further, as described above, the upper edge of the side wall between the ball tank and the bypass passage is higher than the rear end of the overflow surface portion (the passage surface on which the game medium rolls in the bypass passage). It is possible to prevent the game medium from overflowing from the ball tank to the bypass passage without passing through the flow surface portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game medium from the side (ball tank) to the bypass passage, so that the flow of the game medium in the bypass passage from the overflow surface portion on the front end side to the tank rail on the rear end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward which the pressure of the game medium guided from the bypass passage to the tank rail can be fixed. Therefore, in the tank rail, it is possible to prevent the game media from being pressed against each other to be bitten by the pressure directions applied to the game media being different, and it is possible to prevent clogging of the game media. it can.

Further, at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank, the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion is higher than that of the overflow portion, so that the game medium supplied to the ball tank is not from the overflow portion. It is possible to prevent spilling to the outside, and to avoid the problem that the game medium spilled on the outside of the main body frame is sandwiched between the outer frame and the main body frame and the main body frame cannot be opened and closed. it can.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"On both sides of the bypass passage in the left-right direction on the side opposite to the ball tank, the body frame is provided, the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game medium, and the height of the bottom surface is the tank. It further comprises a discharge portion which is lower than a portion where the upper side of the rail is open.”

By the way, when the game media supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank bounces or rolls vigorously on the overflow surface, and spills to the outside of the bypass passage, the spilled game media to the tank rail. If it is guided, the game medium will be sent into the tank rail from a direction different from that of the game medium guided by the bypass passage. Therefore, the game medium in the tank rail will be spilled outside the bypass passage. However, the game medium is pushed in a direction different from the flowing direction of the game medium by the tank rail, which may cause clogging of the game medium in the tank rail.

According to the configuration of the means 4, the gaming machine is provided on the main body frame on the opposite sides of the bypass passage from the left and right sides of the bypass passage on the opposite side to the ball tank. Is further provided with a discharge portion that is lower than a portion where the upper side of the tank rail is open.

Thus, if for some reason a game medium that spills to the outside of the bypass passage through the overflow surface portion is spilled, the game medium can be received by the discharge portion provided outside the bypass passage. Since the bottom surface of this discharge portion is formed lower than the portion of the tank rail where the upper side is open, the received game medium is not sent into the tank rail, and the game medium spilled from the bypass passage As a result, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being clogged in the tank rail.

The game medium received by the discharge unit may be discharged to the rear of the main body frame and returned to the island facility side, or may be stored in the discharge unit.

Means 5: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 4,
"The tank rail is
A gutter-shaped main guiding portion that extends from near the upstream to the downstream end in at least the bottom portion, and the width direction orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game medium is formed so that only one game medium can be distributed.
And a bulge portion formed above the main guide portion and having an open upper side, and bulging wider than the width of the main guide portion so that a plurality of game media are arranged in the width direction. It is characterized by the fact that it is

Here, the "bulging portion" is "formed so as to extend from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed" and "formed only in the portion where the game medium is guided from the bypass passage". ", those formed so as to narrow in the width direction from the upstream side to the downstream side", those "formed so as to widen in the width direction toward the upper side", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 5, the tank rail extends at least at the bottom from the upstream vicinity to the downstream end, and the width direction orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game medium is formed in a gutter shape in which only one game medium can be distributed. Of the main guiding part and a bulging part that is formed above the main guiding part and is open on the upper side, and bulges wider than the width of the main guiding part so that a plurality of game media are arranged in the width direction. And,.

As a result, since the bottom portion of the tank rail is provided with the main guiding portion extending to the downstream end, the game medium in the tank rail reaches the main guiding portion, and the game medium is lined up in the left-right direction. Therefore, the game media in the tank rails can be aligned, and the game media can be reliably guided to the payout device on the downstream side.

In addition, since the upper side is provided with a wide bulging portion in which a plurality of game media can be arranged, the game media released from the rear end of the bypass passage can be reliably received. Therefore, it is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects.

Furthermore, since the tank rail is provided with the wide bulging portion, the volume in the tank rail can be increased, and thus the storage amount of the game medium in the tank rail can be increased.

Means 6: In the configuration of Means 5,
"The tank rail is
The bulging portion extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side and changes so as to match the width of the main guiding portion. It is characterized by being ".

According to the configuration of the means 6, the bulging portion of the tank rail extends from the upstream end to the site where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side. It is designed to change so as to match the width.

As a result, the plurality of game media are aligned in the bulging portion so that they are aligned in a row in the width direction toward the downstream side, and the plurality of game media are aligned on the downstream side (payout). Device).

Means 7: In any one of the means 1 to 6,
"The tank rail is
At least in the portion where the upper side is closed, the height of the flow path through which the game medium flows is formed so as to decrease toward the downstream end."

According to the configuration of the means 7, at least the upper side of the tank rail is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game medium flows decreases toward the downstream end.

As a result, the plurality of game media stacked in the height direction on the upstream side (ball tank side) are circulated to the downstream side through the site where the upper side of the tank rail is closed, thereby increasing the height. The number of stages in the direction can be reduced and aligned, and the plurality of game media can be guided to the downstream side (dispensing device side) in an aligned state.

In addition, when the height of the tank rail at the downstream end is set to the height of one game medium, the game medium can be sent to the downstream side in a state where the vertical direction is aligned in a single step from the downstream end of the tank rail. In this case, the tank rail may have a gutter-shaped main guide portion that extends from near the upstream side to the downstream end and is formed so that only one game medium can flow in the width direction. Thereby, a plurality of game media can be sent to the downstream side in a line from the downstream end of the tank rail.

Means 8: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 7,
"Outside in the left-right direction in the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame, a plurality of wire connection terminals that are provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion, and are capable of connecting electrical wiring from the rear,
It further comprises a terminal cover that covers the upper sides of the plurality of electric wire connection terminals and that has an upper surface that extends horizontally at a position higher than the overflow surface portion."

Here, the "electric wire connection terminal" includes "a terminal whose opening can be grasped by operating a button or a lever to grasp the tip of an electric wire (push terminal, one-touch terminal, etc.)", "tip of an electric wire". And the like in which the grip portion grips the tip of the electric wire (clamp terminal), and "the screw clamps the tip of the electric wiring (screw terminal)".

By the way, if the game medium supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank comes into contact with the electric wire connection terminal for connecting the electric wiring provided in the vicinity of the ball tank in the main body frame for some reason, it comes into contact. Depending on the game medium, the electric wiring may be short-circuited or come off.

According to the structure of the means 8, a plurality of gaming machines are provided at an upper portion of the main body frame, outside the ball tank in the left-right direction, at a position lower than the overflow surface portion, and are capable of connecting electrical wiring from the rear. And a terminal cover that covers the upper sides of the plurality of electric wire connection terminals and that extends horizontally at a position where the upper surface is higher than the overflow surface portion.

As a result, a plurality of electric wire connection terminals to which electric wiring is connected are directed rearward, and the upper side of them is covered with a terminal cover, so when a ball tank is supplied from an island facility, the game spilled from the ball tank. It is possible to make it difficult for the medium to come into contact with the electric wire connection terminal, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as short-circuiting due to contact with the game medium and disconnection of the electric wiring.

Further, since the upper surface of the terminal cover is higher than the overflow surface portion, even if the game medium supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank bounces on the ball tank or the overflow surface portion, it is difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover. be able to. In addition, since the upper surface of the terminal cover extends horizontally, even if the game medium supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover, the game medium is provided with the wire connection terminals. It is possible to make it difficult for the game medium dropped from the upper side of the terminal cover to come into contact with the wire connection terminal and prevent a problem from occurring.

To be more specific, since the upper surface of the terminal cover is higher than the overflow surface portion, in order for the game medium supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover, in the ball tank or the overflow surface portion. It is necessary for the game medium to bounce in the lateral direction (horizontal direction), and the inertial force in the lateral direction acts on the game medium on the upper surface of the terminal cover. And since the upper surface of the terminal cover is horizontal, the game medium on the upper surface of the terminal cover will fall from the lateral side of the upper surface of the terminal cover instead of the rear side due to the lateral inertial force. Therefore, since the game medium on the upper surface of the terminal cover does not drop from the rear side, the game medium does not come into contact with the plurality of electric wire connection terminals arranged below the rear end of the terminal cover, There is no problem such as short circuit or disconnection of electric wiring due to contact with the game medium.

It is desirable that the wire connection terminal and the terminal cover have a bypass passage and a discharge portion provided between the wire connection terminal and the terminal cover. As a result, the electric wire connection terminal and the terminal cover can be placed far away from the ball tank to which the game medium is supplied from the island facility, so that the game medium supplied from the island facility splashes on the ball tank and the overflow surface part. It is possible to make it difficult to reach the electric wire connection terminal or the like even when the power is supplied vigorously, and it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of the above-described problems.

Means 9: In the gaming machine,
"A frame-shaped outer frame that can be attached to island equipment,
A main body frame attached to the outer frame so as to be hinge-rotatably attached, and to which a game board having a game area in which a game is played by hitting a game medium is attached,
It is provided in the upper part of the main body frame, has a container shape with an open upper side, and has a overflow part formed by cutting out from the upper side of the front wall to be lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge, A ball tank capable of storing the supplied game medium,
The downstream side extends to one side in the left-right direction away from the ball tank, the upper side from the middle of the flow direction of the game medium to the downstream end is closed, and the game medium flows at least at a portion where the upper side is closed. It is formed so that the height of the flow path becomes lower toward the downstream end, extends at least at the bottom from near the upstream to the downstream end, and there is only one game medium in the width direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game medium. A gutter-shaped main guide portion formed so as to be flowable, and the main guide extending above the main guide portion from an upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, so that a plurality of game media are arranged in the width direction. And a bulging portion that bulges wider than the width of the portion and that changes in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side to change to match the width of the main guiding portion. , Aligning the game media stored in the ball tank and circulating the game media to the downstream side, and a tank rail provided in the main frame,
A payout device provided on the main frame at a position lower than the tank rail, for paying out the game medium guided by the tank rail,
It is provided on the front side of the ball tank in the main body frame, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail in the left-right direction extends outward from the ball tank, and moves forward from the ball tank. An overflow surface part that is inclined so that the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow part and the front end side is higher in order to return the overflowing game medium to the ball tank,
While extending rearward from a portion outside the ball tank at the rear end of the overflow surface portion to above the bulging portion where the upper side of the tank rail is opened, the rear end side is inclined so as to be low, A detour passage that is inclined so that the side away from the ball tank in the left-right direction is low, and is capable of guiding the game medium overflowing from the ball tank to the overflow surface portion,
The body frame is provided on the opposite side of the ball tank from the outer sides of the bypass passage in the left-right direction, the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game medium, and the height of the bottom surface is in the tank rail. A discharge part lower than the part where the upper side is open,
A plurality of upper end portions of the main body frame, which are opposite to the bypass passage with the discharge portion in between, are provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion, and are capable of connecting electrical wiring from the rear. A wire connection terminal,
And a terminal cover that covers the upper sides of the plurality of electric wire connection terminals and that has an upper surface that extends horizontally at a position higher than the overflow surface portion."

According to the configuration of the means 9, the game machine is provided with a frame-shaped outer frame that is attached to the island facility and a hinge rotatably attached to the outer frame, and a game area in which a game is played by driving a game medium is provided. A main body frame to which the game board is attached and a container shape provided on the upper part of the main body frame, the upper side of which is open, and is cut out from the upper side of the front wall to be formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge And has a ball tank that can store the game media supplied from the island facility, and the downstream side extends to one side in the left-right direction away from the ball tank, from the middle of the circulation direction of the game media to the downstream end. The upper side is closed, and the height of the flow path through which the game medium flows is formed so as to decrease toward the downstream end at least in the portion where the upper side is closed, and at least at the bottom part from near the upstream end to the downstream end. A gutter-shaped main guide part extending up to the width direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game medium so that only one game medium can flow, and above the main guide part, the upper side is closed from the upstream end. Extends wider than the width of the main guiding part so that multiple game media are lined up in the width direction, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side and matches the width of the main guiding part. Has a bulge that changes so that the game media stored in the ball tank are aligned and circulated to the downstream side, and the tank rail provided in the main frame and the tank rail It is provided on the main body frame at a position lower than that, and is provided on the front side of the ball tank in the main body frame, and a payout device for paying out the game medium guided by the tank rail. The same side as the downstream side of the tank rail in the direction extends outward than the ball tank, and in order to return the game medium overflowing from the ball tank to the ball tank, the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow part and the front end side is Overflow surface that is inclined to be higher, and extends rearward from the outside of the ball tank at the rear end of the overflow surface to above the bulge where the upper side of the tank rail is open, and the rear end side is low. And the bypass passage that can guide the game medium overflowing from the ball tank to the overflow surface part, and the bypass passage. A part of the left and right outer sides, which is provided on the main body frame on the side opposite to the ball tank, the distance in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game medium, and the height of the bottom surface is open on the upper side of the tank rail. Lower than It is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface part on the upper part of the main body frame on the side opposite to the bypass passage with the discharge part between them, and it is possible to connect electrical wiring from the rear. Of the electric wire connection terminal, and a terminal cover that covers the upper sides of the plurality of electric wire connection terminals and extends horizontally at a position where the upper surface is higher than the overflow surface portion.

As a result, the front wall of the ball tank in the main body frame has an overflow portion notched so as to be lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge, and the rear end is at the same height as the overflow portion and the front end side is higher. Since it has a sloping overflow surface part, when the amount of game media stored in the ball tank increases as it is supplied from the island facility, first of all, the height of the outermost upper edge is the highest. Can flow out of the ball tank to the outside (forward) of the ball tank, allowing the game medium overflowing from the ball tank to escape to the overflow surface section, and at the same time from the ball tank to the forward overflow surface section. The game medium thus made can be returned into the ball tank by the inclination of the overflow surface portion. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game medium from further increasing in the ball tank, it is possible to prevent the game media from strongly pressing each other in the ball tank (increase in ball pressure), and In, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball damage) due to the meshing of the game media.

Also, since it has a bypass passage, it is possible to send the game medium overflowing from the ball tank to the overflow rail to the tank rail via the bypass passage, so that the game medium accumulated in the overflow surface causes the inside of the ball tank. It is possible to avoid a strong pressing force to the rear of the game medium, and it is possible to prevent clogging of the game medium in the ball tank. Further, since the game medium can be sent to the tank rail through the bypass passage, it is possible to prevent the game medium overflowing from the ball tank or the overflow surface portion from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game medium spilled outside the main body frame is sandwiched between the outer frame and the main body frame and the main body frame cannot be opened and closed.

Furthermore, in the bypass passage, since the side away from the ball tank in the left-right direction is inclined so as to be low, the game medium overflowing from the ball tank through the overflow surface portion is guided to the downstream side of the tank rail by the bypass passage. In addition to being able to guide to, the game medium can be sent to the tank rail from a certain position along the side away from the ball tank, so the flow (pressure) by the game medium sent to the tank rail by the bypass passage. Can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail, and it is possible to prevent the game media from being pressed against each other in the tank rail and prevent the game media from being jammed.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge other than the overflow portion is higher than that of the overflow portion at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank, the horizontal direction in the ball tank between the ball tank and the bypass passage is increased. The upper edge of the one side wall is higher than the rear end of the overflow portion, that is, the overflow surface portion. As a result, the game medium flowing from the ball tank over the overflow part to the overflow surface part and flowing from the overflow surface part to the detour passage is blocked by the side wall on one side of the ball tank, thereby making a detour. It is possible to prevent returning from the passage to the ball tank side, and to prevent the game medium on the bypass passage side from pressing the game medium on the ball tank side to cause clogging of the game medium in the ball tank. You can

Further, as described above, the upper edge of the side wall between the ball tank and the bypass passage is higher than the rear end of the overflow surface portion (the passage surface on which the game medium rolls in the bypass passage). It is possible to prevent the game medium from overflowing from the ball tank to the bypass passage without passing through the flow surface portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game medium from the side (ball tank) to the bypass passage, so that the flow of the game medium in the bypass passage from the overflow surface portion on the front end side to the tank rail on the rear end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward which the pressure of the game medium guided from the bypass passage to the tank rail can be fixed. Therefore, in the tank rail, it is possible to prevent the game media from being pressed against each other to be bitten by the pressure directions applied to the game media being different, and it is possible to prevent clogging of the game media. it can.

Further, since the bottom portion of the tank rail is provided with the main guiding portion extending to the downstream end, when the game medium in the tank rail reaches the main guiding portion, the game medium is lined up in the left-right direction. Therefore, the game media in the tank rail can be aligned, and the game media can be reliably guided to the payout device on the downstream side. Further, in the region where the upper side of the tank rail is open, since a wide bulging portion capable of arranging a plurality of game media is provided, the game media released from the rear end of the bypass passage can be reliably held. Therefore, it is possible to receive the above-mentioned action and effect.

In addition, the bulging portion of the tank rail extends from the upstream end to the site where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side so that it matches the width of the main guiding portion. Since the plurality of game media are arranged in a row in the width direction, the plurality of game media can be aligned in the width direction toward the downstream side. In addition, the upper side of the tank rail is closed so that the height of the flow path through which the game medium flows decreases toward the downstream end, so the height on the upstream side (ball tank side) By circulating the plurality of game media that are stacked in a plurality of stages in the direction to the downstream side through the site where the upper side of the tank rail is closed, the number of stages in the height direction can be reduced and aligned. Therefore, by the tank rail, the plurality of game media can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device side) while being aligned in a line.

Further, since the overflow surface portion and the bypass passage are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game media therein, and since the tank rail is provided with the bulging portion, the tank rail Since the internal volume can be increased, more game media can be stored together with the ball tank.

Further, on the side opposite to the ball tank with the bypass passage and the discharge portion in between, a plurality of electric wire connection terminals to which electric wiring is connected, and a terminal cover for covering the upper side of the plurality of electric wire connection terminals are provided, Since the electric wire connection terminal and the terminal cover can be placed far away from the ball tank to which the game medium is supplied from the island facility, the game medium supplied from the island facility bounces and vigorously in the ball tank and the overflow surface part. Even if it is supplied, it is possible to make it difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal or the like, and there is no problem such as short circuit or disconnection of electric wiring due to contact of the game medium.

In addition, since the multiple wire connection terminals are directed rearward and the top surface of the terminal cover is higher than the overflow surface, the game media supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank splashes at the ball tank and the overflow surface. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover, and it is possible to make it difficult for the game medium to fall from the rear side even when the game medium rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover, and it is easy to avoid the occurrence of the above problems be able to.

Means 10: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 9,
The gaming machine is
A game area in which a game medium is loaded by a player's operation,
A plurality of receiving ports arranged in the game area and capable of receiving the game medium,
It is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media according to acceptance of the game media into the receiving port.

Here, the "reception opening" is "a general winning opening that is always open in the game area", "an advantageous game state that is always open in the game area and is advantageous to the player by receiving the game medium. Starting prize hole (starting opening) in which a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate "the game medium is received in a specific inlet (chucker) in the game area, "Variable winning openings that can be accepted (variable starting openings, accessory winning openings, etc.)", "Ordinary lottery drawn by the game medium passing through specific areas (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the variable winning opening (variable starting opening, winning portion winning opening, etc.) that allows the receiving of the game medium", "the specific area (eg, gate, chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing, it becomes possible to accept the game medium, and a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate an advantageous game state in which the game medium is favored by the acceptance of the game medium. "Winning hole (variable starting port)", "V winning hole that generates an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage when the game medium received in the prize winning hole is sorted and accepted by the sorting means", Examples of the advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage include a large winning opening and a winning slot for winning a game medium that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern.

In addition, as a "pachinko machine", "a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous game state in which a player is advantageous by receiving a game medium into the starting opening, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means According to the special symbol is displayed after changing the stop display, the special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result which is drawn by the combination of the stopped special symbols and the special lottery result display means for the advantageous game state. When a special lottery result to be generated is displayed, an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing the special winning opening (a so-called digital pachi machine)", "character winning When the distribution means for distributing the game media received in the mouth and the game media distributed by the distribution means are received in the V winning opening, the player winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, which is advantageous for the player. An advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state (what is called a so-called honey machine)", "has a special winning opening and a prize winning opening, and is selected by receiving a game medium into the starting opening Depending on the result of the special lottery, the special winning opening or the special winning opening is opened or closed in a predetermined pattern, and when the game medium accepted in the special winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the special winning opening or the special winning opening is predetermined. And the like, which includes an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by opening and closing in a pattern of (a so-called multifunction machine).

According to the configuration of the means 10, the gaming machine is provided with a game area in which a game medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of receiving openings arranged in the game area and capable of receiving the game medium, and a game to the receiving opening. A pachinko machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media according to acceptance of the media. With this, in the pachinko machine, it is possible to achieve the action and effect of any of the above-described means.

Means 11: In any one of the means 1 to 9,
The gaming machine is
It is a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

Here, the "fusion machine (parrot machine)" in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused is a plurality of symbols depending on the operation of a start operation unit (for example, an operation lever) after a plurality of game media are loaded. While changing the display of the symbol sequence consisting of, after that, the fluctuation of the symbol sequence is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation part (for example, the stop button), and the game medium is paid out according to the combination of the stopped symbols, which is advantageous to the player. Such a privilege (for example, an advantageous game state) is given. In addition, when the stop operation unit is not operated even after the lapse of the predetermined time, the variable display of the symbol row may be stopped in response to the lapse of the predetermined time.

Further, as a combination of stop symbols in a plurality of symbol columns, "the number of effective lines for determining a combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media used in one game", "a plurality of symbol columns The internal lottery is executed with the start of fluctuation of, and the one that gives the advantage that the player is advantageous according to the combination of the stopped symbols and the selected internal lottery result, "the effective line for determining the combination of the stopped symbols is It is fixed”. In addition, as "privilege", "big bonus (BB)", "regular bonus (RB)", "cherry rush bonus (CRB)", "replay", "long replay time (LRT)", "assist time ( AT)”, and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 11, the gaming machine is a fusion machine (parrot machine) in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. Thereby, in the fusion machine in which the pachinko machine and the pachi-slot machine are fused, it is possible to obtain the action and effect of any of the above-mentioned means.

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing clogging of the gaming medium in the ball tank that stores the gaming medium supplied from the island facility.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and saw it from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame that is disassembled and seen from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as seen from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the lower front side. It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the back. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of a door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with a lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing/retreating direction of the production operation section button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit and was seen from the front lower side. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lower position, (b) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a raised position. It is the explanation drawing which shows the relationship between the production operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in a raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a dish unit when is pressed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of a door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front lower part. It is a front view of a door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. It is the rear cross-sectional view which cut|disconnected the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the center of the front-back direction of the delivery blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear direction center of the dispensing blade when the ball-removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the lower back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit for every main structure and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from the back. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail and the like are assembled in a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101(a) disassembled and seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area|region where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank flows in the upper part of the main frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main-body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back at the hinge side. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the inside of a game area in which game balls are distributed on a game board. It is a front view of a center accessory and a table production unit in the table unit of the game board. It is a side sectional view of the front effect unit along with the center accessory cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between LED in a front production unit, and the reflective recessed part of the front light guide plate. It is a front view which shows the light emission aspect of a front light guide plate. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front light guide plate of the front performance unit is made to emit light. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the lower front central decorative body is made to emit light in the lower movable effect unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the lower central lifting base is raised in the lower movable effect unit to cause the lower front central decorative body and the lower rear central decorative body to emit light. In the lower movable production unit, the lower center elevating base, the lower left side elevating base and the lower right side elevating base are raised to emit light from the lower front central decorative body, lower rear central decorative body, lower left side decorative body, and lower right side decorative body. It is the front view of the game board which is shown. FIG. 117 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the game board is in the state of FIG. 116 and the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The four rotary decorations, the left side rotary decorations, the left subside rotary decorations, the right side rotary decorative bodies, and the right subside rotary decorative bodies in the lower movable production unit are respectively developed to schematically show the decoration of the decorative portion on each surface. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the kind (size) of the arrow light-emitted and displayed in a lower movable production unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where an upper rear left decorative body and an upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit are lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive mechanism of an upper back movable production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the clutch mechanism of an upper back movable production unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit is lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the upper front movable decoration of an upper front movable production unit. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine roughly.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 which is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the elevated position, as viewed from the front right. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled and was seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extends vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the outer frame upper member 30 are attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60, the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4 and the main body This is to rotatably support the lower frame hinge assembly 520 on the same axis, and to attach the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the lower outer frame assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is formed. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted and the sound is emitted to the front, so that the player can hear a more deep bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the performance operation unit 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, it is possible to entertain the player by operating the production operation unit 301.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Body frame upper hinge member 510 and main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and a game. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. The payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 are covered. A back cover 640, a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by an operation of a player, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially square shape in front view, and a front component member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. , A rear unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect according to a game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by receiving or passing the game balls B ( For example, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005 and a second big winning opening 2006, which are provided with a predetermined number of gaming balls B). Equipped with. The obstacle nail is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player can hit the game ball B by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is transferred to the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. It is possible to entertain the player with the operation of driving the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B in the game area 5a, the front effect unit 2600, and the lower movable effect. The unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 and the like can perform a movable effect and a light emission effect to entertain the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and seen from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically.

As shown, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends to each other, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper surface left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 respectively extend vertically and are arranged apart from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame 4 is for opening and closing.

First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 includes a recessed portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in a rear side portion of the left side surface that is divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a right side portion that is opposite to the recessed portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b bulging toward one side and a cavity portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b are provided. The outer frame left member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the rear lower lateral fixing portion 12c into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is brought into contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 contacts the horizontal fixing portion 12a with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-like upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, the plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending in a short direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 contacts the rear surface of the contact portion 13d with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and contacts the left side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. When the screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, the lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, screws are screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connection member that is attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 includes a recessed portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left at a rear side portion of the right side surface that is divided into three in the front-rear direction, and a left side portion that is opposite to the recessed portion 21a. The bulging portion 21b bulging toward one side and the cavity portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b are provided. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are enhanced by the recess 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 allows the rear lower lateral fixing portion 22c to be inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower lateral fixing portion 22c on the rear side abutting on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the right end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat horizontal lower fixing portion 23c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and the left side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat plate-shaped abutting portion 23d extending in a short direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and makes the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, the screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with a flat plate-like mounting portion 24a, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. And a plate-like hooking piece portion 24b to which the upper frame hook 653 is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a flat plate shape, and extends from the front side of the attachment portion 25a to the left. The plate-like hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and the insertion which allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later in the left-right direction.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that are vertically penetrated and are respectively recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on the left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at the left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame that is disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated left and right, and the outer frame lower member 41 that extends left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 41. A box-shaped front panel member 42, which is disposed in front of the member 41, extends leftward and rightward along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain member 43, which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extends to the left and right, and the front side of which is open, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43. And a mechanism 44.

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a which are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a vertically penetrating state at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

The outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position near the rear in the center of the front-rear direction to the front end side. The recess 41b maximizes the volume of the curtain plate inner space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 by the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 and becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The front curtain plate member 42 has an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 extends slightly shorter in the left-right direction than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape having an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface, the curtain plate rear member 43 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a which is a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends leftward and rightward and projects upward and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a at the center portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is located higher toward the rear side from the front end side which is coincident with a general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylindrical portion 43a. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and thus the speaker unit The enclosure 624 is formed by communicating with the internal space of 620a.

The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is a game ball B between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 due to the game ball B staying at the site of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is to prevent the product from being caught.

The ball catching mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed to the mounting portion 44a. A first outlet 44b that is open upward at the left end of 44a, a second outlet 44c that is open upward to the right of the first outlet 44b in the mounting portion 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and inclined so that the upper surface thereof is positioned upward as it goes rearward. And a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first outlet 44b and the second outlet 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are not in communication with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is provided when an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. By the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placing portion 44a, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an incorrect tool comes into contact with the upright wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the forwardly projecting upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placing portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving rearward, the game ball B easily stays on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B is retained on the placing portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the mounting portion 44a is discharged to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first hole. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45, which are arranged on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, so as to be laterally separated from each other, and an opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-like grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front-rear direction, which are attached inside the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 are for contacting the lower ends of the door frames 3 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 uses two cylinders to connect the curtain plate internal space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46. The port member 47 has two cylinders each having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted backward (in the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 according to the Helmholtz resonance principle. As a result, rich bass can be emitted to the front of the outer frame 2 (on the player side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting cylinder part 43 a and the lower end of the connecting part 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In addition, the sound in the enclosure of the speaker is prevented from leaking from between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of the (a) seen from the lower front side. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is mounted on the outer frame upper hinge member 51 and the outer frame upper hinge member 51 mounted on the upper end of the recess 11 a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30 b of the outer frame upper member 30. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the outer frame hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and extends upward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a, which is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically to the center of the front extending portion 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b toward the front, and vertically penetrating, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a and a downward extending edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. And a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a leftward extension extending from the rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely to the left front and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the attachment screw 53.

The lock member 52, when attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, allows the lock body 52a to block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space for accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a.

The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c. Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a that is behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size that passes through the horizontal portion 60a in the vertical direction and through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and is not illustrated. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that it rolls to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling rearward of the body frame 4, and thus the outer frame. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the site of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the back. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached via the main body frame 4 so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side. Has been. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. Of the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame, the tray unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the tray unit 200 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100 The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 mounted on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410. And a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) having a vertically extending outer shape in a front view, and has a door window 101a penetrating in the front and back, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view, and the speaker duct 103 mounted on the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in the rear view, and the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 in the rear view. The rear handle relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104, and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 which cover from the rear side, the door frame relay board cover 107, and the handle rear relay board 106 which covers from the rear side. The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 and a cable cover 109 for covering the wiring cable are provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The lower frame hinge member 125, the opening/closing cylinder lock 130 mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part on the right side in rear view of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 182 that can be rotated by a player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved to the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launching device 540. It is for playing a game that is driven into.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view can be hingedly rotated with respect to the main body frame 4, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is openably and closably closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right of the front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 mounted near the rear end of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view, and a door frame main relay in the lower rear part of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 in the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A handle rear relay substrate cover 108 which is mounted on the rear side of the rear cover 106 and covers the rear relay substrate 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 which is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. I have it.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The lower frame hinge member 125, the opening/closing cylinder lock 130 mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part on the right side in rear view of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a substantially quadrangular inner peripheral shape that extends vertically in a front view. The door window 101a has upper and left and right sides that form an inner circumference approaching the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and a lower side that forms an inner circumference vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 the height of the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed at a lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b, which is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes further forward than the right end side, a handle mounting seat surface 101b, and a door window 101a. And a recessed portion in the vicinity of the right end in the front view from the rear surface toward the front, and an insertion concave portion 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion concave portion 101c that penetrates in the front and rear direction of the cylinder lock 130. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated forward and backward on the left side in a front view, and the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. And a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the above.

Further, the door frame base 101 extends to the left from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. A passage opening 101f, a top plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the penetration ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h is provided that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i which are formed in a lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) as viewed from the front and which penetrate through the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located rearward. The speaker 622 is located so that the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating forward and backward below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted into the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 penetrates the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion. A plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c that project into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in plural in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a.

The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three protrusions 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be restricted.

In addition, since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 is attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, The axis of the tubular portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The speaker duct 103 has a rear end of a tubular portion located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, a sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker opening 211b in the plate unit base 211, it is possible to satisfactorily guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in a front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3 of the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board/door frame sub relay board/handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangular shape with its outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an outer shape formed in an inverted L shape in which a rectangular shape extending left and right is combined on the right side in a front view of an upper portion of a rectangular shape extending vertically, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 extends vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. For relaying the connection between the window interior decoration substrate 413, the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface substrate 635 of the body frame 4, The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are such that the door frame main relay board 104 and the portion extending vertically of the door frame sub relay board 105 are the doors when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay substrate 106 connects the door frame main relay substrate 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the one-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle post substrate 106 is in a state in which the rear side is covered with the rear handle post substrate cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay substrate cover 107, the handle rear relay substrate cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side in front view being open. In the assembled state of the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay substrate 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and has a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112, which are vertically spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left and right connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the left end side of the left reinforcing frame 111, which is attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that connect the right reinforcing frame 112 to each other and a plurality of door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 are vertically spaced apart from each other. And a hook member 116 to be hooked.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically spaced apart and penetrate in the front-rear direction. Through the insertion holes, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with a length substantially the same as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction such that the vertical direction is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position that coincides with the upper dish ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is aligned with the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right, and is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It is provided with a pair of side piece portions that extend in a plate shape from the sides to the front side, and a plate-shaped front piece portion that connects the sides at the front ends of the pair of front extension portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to a front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. A door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked to these hooking members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are stamped from a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). In the door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. Then, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated relative to the main body frame 4. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 that is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 that is vertically movably attached to the hinge bracket 121, and a flange that is attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame to move upward are provided.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a that is square in a front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b that extends forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. In the state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of projecting pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. The portion that extends above the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered around a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the collar member 123.

The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 projects above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

When the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves a lower end portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 that extends horizontally against the urging force of the lock spring 124 downward, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is entirely moved. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it out. it can. Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the body frame upper hinge member 510, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thus, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state.

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a flat plate-like mounting piece 125a when viewed from the front, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, located at a position coaxial with the vertically extending part of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. Installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. You can

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used to open and close the lock. The cylinder lock 130 is a columnar cylinder body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a cylinder hole attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the key hole 132 to be a regular cylinder. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end to the front at positions facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of cutout portions to rotate the rotation. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the dish unit body 252 of the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has the entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the ball exit 141b that is opened below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 that is opened, and a game ball that is closed from the front end of the front cover 141 and has a box shape that is opened at the front and that has entered through the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. A rear cover 142 which is a ball removing member 143 having a partition 143a for partitioning the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of 141, and the game balls B on the partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

In the ball feeding unit 140, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball removing member 143 is arranged on the left side of the ball feeding member 144, Ball feeding solenoids 145 are respectively arranged on the right side of the feeding members 144.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 143 on the left side of the ball removing port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball removing member 143, which will be described later, extends from 141c forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guideway 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 for removing the upper bowl. Also, it is formed so as to close the portion open to the rear on the upstream end side of the ball guide passage 241c from the rear side.

The ball-removing member 143 divides the space between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b below the entrance 141a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 143a is lowered toward the ball-feeding member 144. Around a shaft that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up and down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. The pivot rod 143b rotatably supported on the rod 143b, the rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rod 143b, and the rod 143b below the rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a is provided. The operating rod 143c of the ball punching member 143 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34(a)). The operating rod 143c is an upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper dish ball pulling button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the entrance 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball-removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. A ball holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 is rotated around the axis of rotation by moving the rod 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking section 144a faces the partition section 143a and at the same time the ball holding section 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding section 144b covers the partition section 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hitting ball supply port 142a and has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked by the blocking unit 144a from moving toward the ball holding unit 144b (ball hitting supply port 142a) and remains on the partition unit 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a, and the end of the ball holding part 144b on the side of the rod part 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip which swings up and down in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the up-down direction.

The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146 a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that an end (right end) on the opposite side of the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated, and feeds the ball around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side near the crank 147 moves upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the self-weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward centering on the right end. It rotates like this and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation rod 146, the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the ball feeding actuating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a and the engaging portion 147a which is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 and extends in the left-right direction. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the side opposite to the side and rotatably supported around a shaft that extends in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, so that the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is in a state in which the tip is located below the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and this state is set. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. Turn to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 125) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to receive a moment such that it is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by a ball pulling member 143 pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding toward the front of the ball removing member 143 should come into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation thereof is restricted, in a normal state, the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition the ball. The game ball B does not enter.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removing button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate ball removing slider slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion, and the operating rod 143c is moved as the operation transmitting portion moves downward. Will also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a drops to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guide passage 241c of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 of the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 in which the operation transmitting portion 242b with which the working rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 contacts is formed upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the force is supplied with vigor, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 through the operating rod 143c, the ball-removing member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is partitioned. It can be prevented from bouncing back at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35(b) etc.) which is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and A fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape in the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 148a and the upper piece portion 148a which are vertically separated at a substantially vertical center in a predetermined distance from the right side to the left side. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the front end side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. .. The upper piece portion 148a of the tamperproof member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamperproof member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal gaming ball B attached with a string is driven from the upper plate through the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540, and is attached to the illegal gaming ball B. The momentum of the illegal game ball B shot (struck) by the ball launching device 540 when an illegal act such as operating the string provided and taking the illegal game ball B into and out of the first starting opening is performed. The string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b by the V-shape formed by the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed part, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball B with a string attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. The foul cover unit 150 is, as shown in the figure, a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and has an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. And 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and a through ball passage 150a that connects the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port of the plate unit, A through-ball passage 150a is provided on the lower right side in a front view toward the rear, and is provided with a full-ball receiving port 150b which is capable of communicating with the full-tank guiding path of the lower full-ball path unit of the main body frame 4. ..

Further, the foul cover unit 150 does not reach the inside of the game area 5a in spite of being launched by the ball launching device of the main body frame 4 on the right side of the full-ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front and being launched upward. The foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving the game ball B (foul ball) and the game ball B received in the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c which are open toward the front near the lower right corner of the front view. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. A storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the lower end thereof is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. A full tank detection sensor 154 for detecting the rotation in the direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 for urging the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In the foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is stored in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates as described above, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B, and when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects a full tank, further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall to that effect and urge the lower plate 202 to be completely filled.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through-ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening/closing door of the lower full tank ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4 described later. A door opening/closing contact portion 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. This glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game is played. The front of the region 5a is closed.

The glass unit 160 is a frame-shaped glass frame 161 larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and attachable to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed so that the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protrusion 163b of the glass unit attachment member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 97 ).

The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disk-shaped base portion 163a that is mounted rotatably around an axis line extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a rod shape from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis line. And a projecting portion 163b which is formed. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attaching member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is detached from the door frame base 101, it can be detached by the procedure reverse to the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attachable to and detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotating position below the base portion 163a, the projecting portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to the position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally separated from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 170 has a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 that shortly projects rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171, and is arranged left and right apart from each other. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward of the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front component member 1000, an out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to project into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body 171 and the rear protruding piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to follow a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear protruding piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

The security cover 170, in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, has a front surface of the main body 171 contacting a rear surface of the glass unit 160 (a rear end of the glass frame 161) and a portion protruding rearward from a lower side of the main body 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is in a state of being inserted into the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the gap between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attaching member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be driven by the player to drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle attaching member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration board 184 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the cover pedestal 183; and a front side of the handle decoration board 184. And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, a handle 182 attached to the front end, and a rotatably attached inner base 186 and handle base 181 to provide an outer periphery. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner member. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side of which is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in the direction.

In addition, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip end side that protrudes outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 in a front view and the base. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is behind the inner base 186 and is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting a pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. And an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disc-shaped front end 181b radially protruding from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively inserted into the three grooves 181c. When the handle base 181 is inserted, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four rotary shafts (shaft members 187) and four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction. Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 are projecting rearward from a position inside the slit 182e with respect to the rotation center. Locking projection 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in a clockwise direction in a front view of a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, bulging outward so as to bulge outward. The side surface in the direction of is dented (curved) so that it curves inward. The second protrusion 182b has a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. It projects slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in the clockwise direction in front view that bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and a side surface in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

The third protrusion 182c is located such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and It projects at about half the height. The side surfaces on both sides of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction, which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and It projects slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed into a substantially isosceles triangle with the side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three attachment bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle range of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward in a round shape, and is transparent. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 to emit light.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view and faces the outside (open side), so that the handle mounting member 102 is The handle unit 180 attached via the terminal also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip end inclines so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). And fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, static electricity that acts on the handle 182 or the like by the player is detected, and the handle 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is emitted with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one and playing the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, and the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 is released, so that before the one-shot button 193 is operated. The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 is provided with four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Then, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hit"), the fourth protrusion 182d is the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the fourth protrusion 182d is used as the first protrusion 182a and the handle 182 is replaced, so that the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state, It is possible to reduce the player's fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit seen from the rear. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into main components and seen from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, which is below the door window 101a. The dish unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and the upper plate 201 for storing the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 is mounted on the front surface of the plate base unit 210. The dish decoration unit 250 having the above, and the effect operation unit 300 mounted on the front surfaces of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left-right direction, an upper plate body 212 having an upper plate 201 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit base 211, and a right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base 213 that is mounted on the mounting base 213 and protrudes to the front; An upper plate bowl removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and an upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front surface of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. Plate unit main body 252, a lower plate ball punching unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate upper left decoration unit 270 which is attached to the upper front part of the plate unit main body 252 with left and right spaces, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

The production operation unit 300 includes, as the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotationally operated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation section base 320 housed in the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation section base 320. A ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. The transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

In addition, the production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 that decorates the production operation ring 330 with light, a decoration substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the operation operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And are equipped with.

The entire dish unit 200 is bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged such that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 is directed obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has the ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front largely bulges forward and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges to the frontmost. The upper plate 201 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in a front view, and the depth of the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lower, and the front end right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

The upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the plate unit base 211 is lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a from the position lower than the upper plate ball feed port 211e to the upper end of the game ball. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B toward the position. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish ball feeding port 211e.

In addition, the guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal grounding member 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact (rolls) with the game ball. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball hole 202a through which the game ball B can be discharged by vertically penetrating the bottom wall. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removal unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction projects further forward than the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball-draining hole 202a penetrating vertically, and is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when assembled in the dish unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball hole 202a is closed, and open the lower plate ball hole 202a. The game ball B stored in can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is opened, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore, from the lower dish ball supply port 211c to the front side. The released game ball B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a by the shortest distance movement.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The plate base unit 210 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there. The dish base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate having an upper plate 201 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit base 211. The main body 212, a mounting base 213 attached to the right side of the upper dish main body 212 in the upper front part of the dish unit base 211, and protruding forward, and a front side of the dish unit base 211 attached to the right side of the mounting base 213. And a dish unit relay board 214.

The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper dish ball removal unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , A unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball, which is attached to the rear of the unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball and on the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow rear opening). It is formed in a box shape.

The dish unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front and also has an upper dish ball supply port 211a that extends cylindrically rearward, and penetrates back and forth below the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower part to the left with respect to the left-right center in a front view and extending rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate A notch portion 211d that is cut to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through on the right side wall of the portion that extends rearward of the ball supply port 211c in a tubular shape, and front and rear on the upper right side in front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. And an upper dish ball feed port 211e located at the right end of the upper dish body 212.

In addition, the dish unit base 211 projects forward to the right of the upper dish ball feed port 211e, and the mounting projection 211f on which the mounting base is placed, and to the left of the upper dish ball feed port 211e. A slider insertion port 211g, which penetrates the front and rear below the plate main body and through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 of the upper plate post-ball removal unit 240 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in front view. A handle insertion opening 211h into which the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion into which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates in the front-rear direction near the right corner in front view. And a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened in the rear wall of the upper plate 201 and the cylindrical rear end of the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the door frame base 101 passes through the upper plate ball when assembled to the door frame 3. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower dish ball supply port 211c, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end from the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. In addition, a downstream end of the ball removal guide passage 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is connected to the cutout portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are operated by the upper plate ball removing button 222, and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, the upper It is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the plate ball and the cutout portion 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges to the front rather than the center of the left and right as viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 is formed such that the front end recedes rearward as it goes from the most bulged portion to the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the plate unit 200 so that the closed upper part near the right end of the upper plate body 212 goes under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper part, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting projection 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open top. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion opening 213a that vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the left end, and a through hole 213b that vertically penetrates at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper bowl removal unit 230 is inserted through the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. A wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decoration board 273, the dish upper right decoration board 278, the plate lower left decoration board 283, and the plate lower right decoration board 288. , And relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the front side of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and then lend a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, display the amount of cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine, or a ball lending machine. It is for deducting the amount of the game ball B rented out from the cash or the prepaid card that has been thrown in and returning it.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223, which is arranged to the right of the pullout button 222 and has translucency, a ball lending button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. A return button 225 arranged on the right side of the front part of the base 223 and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

The upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 projects upward from the upper surface of the base portion 221 in a cylindrical shape, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display section is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card with cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the amount of the rented game ball B is subtracted from the cash or the prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and the card is returned. The ball lending display section displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine. Further, the ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine fails.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing bowl and bowl after removing bowl]
The unit 230 before removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate pre-ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate post-ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging the game balls B stored inside to the lower plate 202.

The upper dish ball removal unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the placing protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after removal of the upper bowl is attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 at a position behind the unit 230 before removal of the upper bowl.

The upper dish removal unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and has a vertically extending cylindrical front base 231 and a front base 231 that is vertically movably inserted into the cylinder. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the vicinity of the front of the upper dish ball feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, the upper end thereof is in contact with the lower end of the upper bowl ball removal button 222, and the lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 of the upper bowl removal unit 242. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The upper bowl removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to close the upper bowl feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear side, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper dish ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the spring, a spring 243 biasing the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. Equipped with.

The rear base 241 has a ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving port 241a, which protrudes upward from a site where the upper dish ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and which is opened forward. A ball feed guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a position on the rear surface of the rear base 241 that is lower than the ball feed guide path 241b. And a ball pull-out guide path 241c for guiding the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The part extending to the left and right of the ball guide passage 241c projects to the right in rear view as compared with the part to which the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably mounted, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view becomes lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The part of the ball guide passage 241c extending to the left and right is closed by the rear cover 244 on the rear side. In the state in which the ball guide passage 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion that extends vertically below the ball feed guide path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball discharge guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is formed in a quadrangle shape in a front view, and projects rearward from an operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from an upper left corner and a rear surface which is a rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. And an operation transmission section 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface thereof is located downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the dish unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper bowl removing unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the. Further, the upper tray ball pulling slider 242 has the operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241 and the operation of the ball pulling member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. The rod 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end of the spring 243 is attached to the upper bowl removing slider 242, and urges the upper bowl removing slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is located at the moving end upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the unit 230 for removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 for removing the upper bowl, the upper bowl ball removing slider 242 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper bowl ball removing slider 242 moves. Through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, the upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 is located at the upper end of the movement. Further, since the upper bowl ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition part 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, in a state where the upper dish ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the space between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b in the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned, and the ball is fed from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side through the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper bowl removing button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper bowl removing slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper bowl removing slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball-punching member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmitting portion 242b, can be moved downward, and the ball-punching member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball-punching member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Moves backward from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball receiving opening 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball exit 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the cutout portion 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball guide passage 241c, and then downward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressing of the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is released, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is released via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball-removing button 222 moves up, the ball-removing member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b. It will be restored to the original state.

In this way, by the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decor unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire dish unit 200.

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and forms a lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the 211, the lower plate ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and the plates attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit main body 252 separately from each other in the left and right direction. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, and the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 280 mounted on the entire surface of the plate unit body 252 below the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate plate decoration unit 275, respectively. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower dish main body 251 extends in the left-right direction and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 at the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the opened rear part is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than on the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball removal hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The bottom plate body 251 is inclined such that its bottom surface is lowered toward the bottom plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removing hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removing lid 265 of the lower dish ball removing unit 260.

The lower plate body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit body 252. Further, the bottom plate body, when assembled in the plate unit 200, has a bottom surface located below the bottom plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the bottom plate ball removal hole 202a has a bottom plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The dish unit body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. Further, the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the upper surface thereof has the lowest center in the left-right direction. The dish unit body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is spaced apart from the left and right in the upper portion, and the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the lower portion. Includes a lower front decoration portion 252b which bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower tray main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c which extends rearward in a flat plate shape from the lower end of the lower front decoration portion 252b. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in the shape of a box whose rear is opened, and the plate upper left decoration unit 270, the lower plate left decoration unit 280, the upper right plate decoration unit 275, and the lower right plate decoration unit are formed on the front of each of them. 285 is attached. The right side of the lower surface of the left side upper bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decoration portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front surface decoration portion 252b.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decoration portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size such that a player's finger can be inserted therein, and is formed such that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

Further, the dish unit body 252 has a front notch 252e that is notched upward from a lower end of the front surface of a portion of the lower front decoration portion 252b that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251, and a lower plate body 251 of the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom face cutout portion 252f that is cut out in a region that is below. The lower dish removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g which penetrates the front and rear at the lower right corner of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b and through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and above the handle insertion opening 252g, the lower front surface. It is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are at the center in the left-right direction. The production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached is provided. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about ⅓ of the width of the plate unit body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled to the dish unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. .. Further, in a state where the dish decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower dish ball pulling button 263 of the lower dish ball punching unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower dish ball punching base 261 of the lower dish ball punching unit 260 is placed. The bottom surface cutout 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower dish removal unit 260 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251 and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 or discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for making things happen.

The lower dish ball punching unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and has a flat plate-shaped lower dish ball punching base 261 having a through hole that vertically penetrates the right front corner in plan view, and a lower dish ball punching unit. A slider 262 that is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the base 261 in the front-rear direction; a lower dish ball removal button 263 that is mounted on the front end of the slider 262; and a spring 264 that biases the slider 262 forward. A lower dish ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower dish ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262 are provided.

The lower dish ball punching base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom cutout 252f of the dish unit body 252, and is vertically positioned at a position corresponding to the lower dish ball punching hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the lower dish ball punching base 261 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction at a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 on the left end side to the left of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and on the right end side, the slider 262. The right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower dish ball withdrawing lid 265 is formed with a slit extending leftward and rightward in which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower dish ball punching unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball punching base 261 closes the bottom cutout portion 252f of the dish unit body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball punching base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit body 252. In a normal state of the lower dish ball removing unit 260, the slider 262 is located at the front moving end by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower dish ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball removal hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is substantially coincident with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pushed rearward and moved rearward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. Becomes When this slider 262 moves rearward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 presses the lower dish ball removing lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removing lid 265 centers the left end side and the right end side moves backward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, by moving the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located directly above the through hole to the rear from the position of the through hole, the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball removal hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, so that the lower plate bowl removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 remains rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, so that the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously connected. It can be discharged downward.

In order to close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b is pressed backward, and the holding mechanism 266 releases the holding of the slider 262. It Then, when the lower plate ball removing button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removing button 263 returns to the state in which it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the plate unit 200.

The plate upper left decoration unit 270 has a translucent plate upper left decoration 271 that extends in the left-right direction and has a semi-cylindrical shape, and a plate upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left decoration 271. And a plate upper left decoration substrate 273 mounted on the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

The plate upper left decoration 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging part 252a. The plate left upper decorative body 271 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper left at the left end and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the semi-cylindrical is twisted. Has been formed. The dish upper left decoration 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the plate upper left decoration 271 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and the plate upper left decoration 271 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

In the state where the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the plate upper left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate upper left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs on the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper left decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light emission, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a plate upper right ornament 276, and a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right ornament 276, And a plate upper right decoration board 278 mounted on the rear side of the plate upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

The plate upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The plate upper right decorative body 276 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper right at the right end and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the semi-cylindrical is twisted. Has been formed. The dish upper right decoration 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decoration body 276 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decoration board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by making them emit light, the dish upper right decoration body 276 can be illuminated and decorated.

The plate upper right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the dish upper right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the dish upper right decoration body 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decoration body 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light emission, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5d-5. Plate lower left decoration unit and plate lower right decoration unit]
The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. To be The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The dish lower left decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a plate lower left ornamental body 281 and a plate lower left reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left ornamental body 281. A plate left lower decoration substrate 283 mounted on the rear side of the plate left lower reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

The plate lower left decoration 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view. Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulge portion 252a. The plate lower left decoration 281 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left rear at the left end, and the center at the right end. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The lower left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The plate lower left decorative body 281 has a semi-circular curvature that becomes thinner toward the left end side. The plate lower left decoration 281 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the plate lower left decorative body 281 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 are full-color LEDs, and the plate lower left decoration body 281 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

The plate lower left decoration unit 280 is, when assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left edge. In the plate lower left decoration unit 280, since the left end of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, it seems that the left end goes into the door frame 3. Since the plate lower left decoration unit 280 does not have ribs in the longitudinal direction of the plate lower left decoration body 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light emission, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has a translucent lower dish right ornamental body 286, and a plate lower right dish lower body attached to the rear side A reflector 287 and a plate lower right decoration board 288 mounted on the rear side of the plate lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The dish lower right decoration body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a rear center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side. The plate lower right decoration 286 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. At the right end, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right rear, and at the left end. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape at the right end. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a curvature of a semi-circular arc that becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decoration body 286 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate lower right reflector 287 is inserted from the rear into the plate lower right decoration body 286, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decoration board 288 are full-color LEDs, and by making the LEDs emit light, the dish lower right decoration body 286 can be illuminated and decorated.

The plate lower right decoration unit 285 is, when assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the lower right side of the dish lower right decoration unit 285 is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right side of the dish lower right decoration unit 285 looks like the right end of the dish lower side is embedded in the door frame 3. Since the plate lower right decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate lower right decoration body 286, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 emit light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 is illuminated. The entire front surface of the can be illuminated and decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as seen from the advancing/retreating direction of the effect operation button. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates to participate in the effect. Is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is configured with an annular outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b arranged between the inner periphery and the inner periphery.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation section base 320 housed in the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation section base 320. A ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation section 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the portion 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352. Of the decorative substrate cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330. An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Performance operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape having an open upper portion and a rear portion.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 which is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 which is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and a unit front. A plate center upper reflector 313 mounted from the rear in the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate center upper reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light forward are mounted. The plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted from the rear inside the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted on the plate center lower reflector 315. And a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the center rear side in the front-rear direction to the front side, and the rear side from this is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in a tilted state such that an axis line perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on the upper end edge extending in a semicircular arc shape in the front portion is located forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a formed at the lowest position when assembled to the dish unit 200.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward so that the shape of the unit front cover 312 in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 has a dish center upper decorative body 312a in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and forward below the dish central upper decorating body 312a. The dish center lower decorative body 312b is formed so that the bulging half arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a half arc shape. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by dividing a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) in half and extending in a semi-arcuate shape with the split surface toward the center side. It is formed in a bent shape. The plate center lower decoration 312b extends in a semi-circular shape with a large curvature with respect to the plate center upper decoration 312a, and the plate center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the plate center upper decoration 312a. Is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The unit front cover 312, when assembled to the dish unit 200, has a front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a that projects further forward than a front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in a state where the dish unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275, respectively, and at the same time, the plate center lower decorative body is The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the left end of the plate lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in a milky white color.

Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and its front end is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the dish center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear side. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LEDs mounted on the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is formed in a semi-circular shape along the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the plate center upper decorative member 312a can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted from the rear into the dish center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312. The lower plate center reflector 315 blocks light from the LEDs mounted on the lower plate center decoration substrate 316 from leaking rearward (inward). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semi-circular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs on the plate lower central decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the plate central lower decorative member 312b can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

Since the effect operation section cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312, which extends in a semi-circular arc shape, When the LEDs of the central upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate of the plate lower central decorative substrate 316 are made to emit light, it is possible to make the whole of them substantially uniformly light-emitting decorated, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310, when assembled to the dish unit 200, has a front end that projects far more forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. In addition, in the rendering operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decoration 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate center lower decoration 312b is the plate lower left decoration 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation base]
The operation section base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation section base 320 is inserted into the effect operation section cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 320 is formed into a box-like shape having a substantially cubic outer shape, and has a main body 321 whose upper side is open, and an outer periphery which extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality of (here, four) leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper mounting portion formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and is opened upward to rotatably support the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

The main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 is formed in a size capable of accommodating the effect operation button unit 360 therein. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and a portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body 321 has a through hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321. In the main body 321, the rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter such that the outer circumference thereof substantially matches the inner circumference of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the decoration substrate cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the production operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

In the gear bearing portion 325, the operation ring transmission gear can be mounted rotatably around the axis extending in the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 projects upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has the flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly lower than the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state in which the production operation unit 300 is assembled, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in contact therewith.

[3-5e-3. Stage operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the upper front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation part 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

The production operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about the vertically extending axis and a plurality of bushes 333 that are attached to the ring mounting base 331 and move the rotation base 332 upward. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates the ring.

In addition, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332, and is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 forming a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the ring outer upper cover 335. The ring outer lower cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operating portion 302 and the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, and form a part of the rotation operating portion 302. And a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a light-transmitting annular shape.

The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring attachment base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is circumferentially spaced outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a boss portion 331b for protrudingly mounting the bush 333 rotatably upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions, and a circumferentially spaced outer side from the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a through hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of portions. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the performance operation unit 300.

The outer ring upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface portion 335a in which a circular arc forming an outer portion and an upper portion in a circle extends annularly, and a plurality of them are arranged in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of outer top cover mounting portions 335c that extend downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extend toward the center side and that are arranged in the circumferential direction. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of ¼ of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc forming an outer and lower portion in a circle extends in an annular shape, and an outer lower surface portion 336a protruding from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a to the upper side and the center side in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b that are arranged on the lower side. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The inner ring cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc forming an inner portion and an upper portion in a circle extends annularly, and a tube extending downward from an inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel with the central axis. The cylindrical surface portion 337b and the inner cover attachment portions 337c that are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and are arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner surface of the cylindrical surface portion 337b has the same size as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are continuous with the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a in a state in which they are assembled to the effect operation ring 330. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion within a range of ½ or more of a circle, and the whole is in a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotary drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. 57A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as disassembled and seen from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled rotary drive unit as seen from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft projects leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. The gear cover 345, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably attached in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 are covered from the left side. 346 and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that is integrally formed with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) than the speed change gear 344, and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at a constant interval. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the distance between them in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integer multiple with respect to the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Accordingly, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, but one detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like this. Accordingly, it is possible to detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 is located inside the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotary drive unit 340 drives the operation ring drive motor 342 to freely rotate the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotary drive unit 340 can reciprocally rotate and vibrate the rotary operation unit 302 by repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation of the drive gear 343 by the operation ring drive motor 342 within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

Further, in the rotary drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. Therefore, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation direction in which the rotation operation is performed. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotational operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operating ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is for transmitting rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 integrally rotates with the bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the transmission detection of the rotary drive unit 340 is performed. And a drive-side gear portion 350b in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring side gear portion 350a and the drive side gear portion 350b are formed so that the pitch circles have the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 from above and the gear attachment member 351 being attached to the operation portion base 320. To be

In the operation ring transmission gear 350, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the production operation ring 330 in a state where it is assembled to the production operation unit 300, and the drive side gear portion 350b is formed. It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotational operation of the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotary drive unit 340 side, and also rotationally drive the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a form in which a ring is divided into front and rear, and is composed of a front decoration substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decoration substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer periphery of each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

The production operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the production operation ring 330 in a state where it is assembled to the production operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a transparent decorative substrate cover 353 on the upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed into a front and rear divided form, like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The production operation ring decoration board 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface to pass through the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331, and outside the ring forming the rotation operation section 302. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Therefore, the player can see the light-emitting decoration such as the LED provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sound such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sound such as voice and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a variety of effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit of the production operation unit that is disassembled and seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit that is disassembled and seen from the front lower side. FIG. 62A is a sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62B is a sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation section base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation section 303 that can be pressed by the player. The press operation section 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical center press operation section 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral press operation section 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation section 303a. ing.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery and is arranged in a target with a button unit base 361 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and a central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a cylindrical shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is mounted between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer circumference thereof is formed into a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which the pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and urge the elevating base 364 upward are provided.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends in a column shape upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by being rotated by the driven gear 369 and having the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, an elevating cam driving gear member 370, a lower end of which is connected, and a central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached to the elevating cam member 371 for elevating and lowering the elevating base 364; 368, a driven gear 369, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted above the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. The central button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 arranged between the central button body 373 and the elevating base 364 for urging the central button body 373 upward, and the central button body 373 are substantially the same. A central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper portion of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375 configure a central pressing operation portion 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to an outer surface of the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and the outer circumference of the central button body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 which covers the outer circumference of the central button body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 having a three-dimensional decoration and disposed on the outer peripheral side above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and ascending/descending so as to cover the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. A transparent outer peripheral button cover 380, which is attached to the base 364 and has a central button cover 375 facing upward in the center, is provided. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 configure an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is mounted on the button unit base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and a pressing cam drive gear member 370 mounted on the button unit base 361. An elevation detection sensor 382 for detecting the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body 321 of the operation portion base 320. The base main body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 mounted on the upper surface, and a lower surface of the pressing detection sensor 381 and the lifting detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base main body 361a from the center to the front and the rear. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of a metal rod. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and their lower ends are in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and their upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrating at a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A standing wall portion 364c protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d protruding in the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall portion 364c are provided. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward due to the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c contacting the upper base 363, and a space in which the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 is movable is provided between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. And a vertical movement detection piece 370c that is protruded downward from the vertical direction and is cut out at two locations facing each other and that is detected by the vertical movement detection sensor 382. The lift cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the shaft center near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end portion in parallel with the axis, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from an end portion of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371a are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided at its lower end with a connected portion 371f that is connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d in the cam portion 371a rotates the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. Is formed. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371 a can guide the guide pin 364 d of the elevating base 364 to elevate the elevating base 364.

The central button body 373 has a cylindrical tubular portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tubular portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts penetrating the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at a center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. A pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom portion 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the tubular portion 373a and the bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects above the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends shortly downward, and its lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, so that the downward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 abuts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button body 373.

The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that the lower ends thereof penetrate the elevating base 364 and extend downward, and the screws into which the washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, whereby the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central opening 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker biasing force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disc-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have a light-transmitting property. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. In the center button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373.

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the central button decoration substrate 376 are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can cause the central button cover 375 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the peripheral button decoration substrate 377 are full-color LEDs. The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can cause the peripheral decoration lens 379 and the peripheral button cover 380 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and has an annular base plate portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364, and a cylindrical shape extending upward from the inner circumference of the base plate portion 378a so that the central button main body 373 has a cylindrical shape. And a cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer circumference. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

In the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decoration lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a in the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The lower end of the tubular portion 380 a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62(a), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in a state in which the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365. The lift cam member 371 is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position in which the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 is compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the moving end toward the upper side by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Has become.

Therefore, when assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 exceeds the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 62(a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward to move downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is pressed. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height substantially matching the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65(c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down drive gear 368 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the up-and-down cam drive is performed via the driven gear 369 meshed with the up-and-down drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that relatively rolls to the left along the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the state of the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of the one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lift drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. Further, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the time of the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the production operation unit 300 is assembled and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of being largely protruded from the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65(b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 attach the button spring 374. The central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364 by moving downward against the force. In the state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is apart from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward by a force stronger than the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, The center button body 373 contacts the elevating base 364, and then the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 abuts the button unit base 361. Become. By contacting the elevating base 364 with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

Thus, when the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button body 373 abuts on the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and pressing of the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward by a force greater than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the elevating base 364 moves the elevating spring 368 through the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of the 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is projected upward by the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button body is The pressing detection piece 373e of 373 does not project downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

To return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. Then, in FIG. 62B, the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 stops moving downward and the guide pin 364d moves the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c that is recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 mounted on the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 mounted in the board box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled in the production operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a plate center upper decoration board 314, a plate center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button lift drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer circumference button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, and the lift detection sensor 382 are relayed to the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65(b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation section is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing of the pressing operation section. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 on the upper surface, which can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation part 303 is a cylindrical central pressing operation part 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating part 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation part arranged between the central pressing operation part 303 a and the rotating operation part 302. And 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation section 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302. More specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 in the left side view, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in a clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward/reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350 to rotate. When the operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in a left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction, is larger than the spacing between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction at equal intervals. , The interval is not an integral multiple. Accordingly, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation part 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation part 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 drives the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened to assist. .. Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation section 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to make the rotation operation heavy or to give a click feeling.

The rotary operation part 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of half or more of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in a donut shape. Then, as shown in the figure, the rotation operating portion 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operating portion 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by a player's hand. ..

As a result, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, it is possible to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 in a manner that is easy for the player to do and operate the rotation operation unit 302. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operating section 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation section 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. Since the lower surface side of the rotating operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring below the effect operation ring 330. Accordingly, by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated. Further, in the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, since the plurality of LEDs are annularly arranged along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs that are lined up are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific portion of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating can be illuminated and decorated. As a result, the player can be illusion that the LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state, in the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65( a ), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface that is higher than that of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a lowered position in which it slightly protrudes upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated and the central pressing operation unit 303a of the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) to detect the pressing. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and press detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the up-and-down base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously projects upward due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65(b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above and above the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project upward more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward with the pressing operation portion 303 in the raised position, first, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are in substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are the rotating operation portion 302. The height is approximately the same as the upper surface (see FIG. 65(c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects the pressure.

In addition, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operating portion 302 (see FIG. 65(a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, so that attention can be paid to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type effect. , It is possible to make the player participation type production more enjoyable.

It should be noted that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, some players can use the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation unit 303 interferes with the rotation operation. The operability of the rotary operation unit 302 can be changed due to the change, and a variety of operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200 and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and a door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decoration board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decoration board 402, The door frame left side decoration body 404 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened to the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decoration board 402 can make the door frame left side decoration body 404 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a penetrating therethrough in the position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decoration 404 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward is vertically extended. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decoration 271 of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 Door frame top decoration 453. Is formed so as to be continuous with the left lower end.

In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state where it is assembled to the door frame 3, and it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right side of the door frame 3 to a position substantially the same as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction. And a plurality of side window interior decorations 410b capable of emitting light, which are arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or the player who is playing on the right pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and it is possible to form a player's personal space that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b that are attached to the front surface, extend in a cylindrical shape forward, and are vertically arranged in rows, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs of the side window decoration part 413 mounted on the front side of the door frame right side base 411 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted in a portion corresponding to the window decoration part 410b and a plurality of side window decoration members 412 are provided. The interior reflectors 414 are inserted into the interior decorations 410b of the side windows.

The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends vertically. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and has a through-hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and forms a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416 and the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is a flat plate in the up-down direction and the front-back direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side inner panel 417 that has a through-hole 417a that extends in the left-right direction and penetrates in the left-right direction to form the side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decoration substrate 418 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (in this case, three) side window interior decoration parts 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-like cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decoration member 412, the front end of the side window decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 at a position above the center in the up-down direction and above the center. The side window decoration member 412 is formed in a translucent milky white color.

The decoration part decoration substrate 413 in the side window is attached to the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 at a position behind the connection base 412a of the decoration member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the decoration part decoration board 413 in the side window, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape in the up, down, left, and right directions around the axis of the decoration part 410b in the side window at a position behind each of the decoration parts 410b in the side window. Has been done.

The inner reflector 414 is formed in an X shape in a front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window inner decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, that is, upper, lower, left and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wave shape that moves forward and then rearward from the upper end toward the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 has a plurality of through holes 415a penetrating in the front-rear direction and through which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending elliptical shape, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The right side decoration substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed so as not to transmit light.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically elongated elliptical shape, and is connected to the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The right side decoration substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed so as not to transmit light.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418 are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 can cause the door frame right side decoration body 419 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward.

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration body 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end thereof is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right side of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and a portion of the door frame right side decoration body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front side (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy manner so that a 1/4 portion thereof projects from the top to the front, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction inside the side window 410a, and makes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 emit light. Thus, the decorative portion 410b in the side window can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window interior decoration portion 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that light-embellish the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off. Through the space between the three side window interior decorations 410b in 410a, the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility). Therefore, even if the player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not have to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily played. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for a game on the pachinko machine 1 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, it is possible to block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity by other portions including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make the whole of the game area 5a difficult for a player to see, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if being seen by another player, so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Furthermore, when the three LEDs on the side window interior decoration part 410b are caused to emit light by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a dazzle, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decorations 410b have a cylindrical shape, light is radiated in a band shape and in a radial shape. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as the neighbor to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, attention is paid to other players. It is possible to prevent discomfort from being unable to concentrate on playing games and to prevent feeling lost due to the induction of mistakes, making games more enjoyable by dedicating players to playing games. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. FIG. 6 is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in a closed state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the lower front side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, and covers the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decoration 453, and the door frame top base 451. , And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453, and a door frame top central decoration board 455 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door. A door frame top left decoration board 456, which is attached to the left of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door A door frame top right decoration board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. I have it.

The door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. And a top right reflector 460 mounted on the front surface of the top top cover 452.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 mounted near the left and right front ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively mounted on the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A bottom lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top A door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending leftward and rightward with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left-right direction, and from the left and right ends near the front surface of the main body portion 451a. And a front protrusion 451b protruding forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is located upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed to have a front view shape that is substantially the same as the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed in such a shape as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect between the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. At the front end of the top top cover 452, the center in the left-right direction projects most to the front, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut out from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame top decoration 453 has a shape in which the semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a curvature that decreases from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. Has been formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower ends of the door frame top decorations 453 and the lower ends of the main body portions 451a of the door frame top bases 451 and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. So that it extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction projects downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape. It has a pair of center speaker openings 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating vertically on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decoration substrate 455 is formed in a strip plate shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decoration board 455 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top central decoration substrate 455 can cause the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip plate shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can cause the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decoration substrate 457 is formed in a strip plate shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can cause the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 respectively extend in the left-right direction, and are provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes penetrating forward and backward are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs the high range of sound such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top center decoration board 455, a door frame top left decoration board 456, a door frame top right decoration board 457, a top center speaker 462, and a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration body 404 and the door frame right side decoration body 419, respectively, to form an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice or music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the drawing, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate center upper decoration 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

A plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate upper center decoration 312a, a door frame left side decoration 404, a door frame right side decoration 419, and a door frame top decoration that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, the player can see a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, the plate upper center decoration 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, which surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, and Behind the door frame top decoration body 453, a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, a door frame top central decoration Since the board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, the LEDs of these decoration boards are appropriately made to emit light, and the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is decorated with light. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to make it.

In the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, a circular donut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper tray 201 in the front-rear direction, and coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotation operating portion 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. Two doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) large-diameter upper decoration body 312a and lower-plate middle decoration body 312b are mounted vertically spaced apart from each other and Door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 and door frame right side decorative body of the door frame right side unit 410 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. The door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation section 302 and the two dish center upper decoration bodies 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b, and the rotation operation section 302 and the outer circumference are arranged. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be conspicuous.

In addition, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate lower left decoration 281, the plate lower right decoration 286, and the plate lower center decoration 312b, which are arranged below the plate center upper decoration 312a, are The thickness of the tubular tube is made slightly thin, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, in the effect operation unit 300, it becomes larger from the lower end to the upper part, so that it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the up-and-down direction, and the rotation operation section 302 arranged on the upper side and operable by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

Further, a doughnut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to make the entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 easily visible, and to make the rotation operating unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 look large. Further, as described above, the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, so that the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operating unit 302 is to be rotationally operated, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation part 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotation operation part 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are projected far more forward than the upper plate 201, and the plate center top Since the decorative body 312a and the dish central lower decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operating unit 302, the dish central upper decorative body 312a, and the dish central lower decorative body 312b are made to be significantly conspicuous. At the same time, the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and to appeal to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the present pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

The body frame 4 has a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. Main frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end of the main frame and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached, Main body lower hinge assembly in which the base unit 500 is attached to the lower end on the left side when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. And a solid 520.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing unit 530 which is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500 so that a game is played within the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launching device 540 for driving the ball B, a reverse L-shaped dispensing base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a dispensing base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 and that covers the rear side of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. And a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view and a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape extending left and right and is opened upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to an upper end of the tank rail 553, The second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 and is spaced apart from the one rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. The ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and the ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering downward direction, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 for the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hooks 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that urges the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward are provided.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear part inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a removable manner. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a base main body 501a that is formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion port 501b, which penetrates the front and rear in the range of the height of the game board 5, is inserted from the front side, and the game board 5 is placed on the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b. It is provided with a placing portion 501c, and a game board regulating portion 501d which protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board placement portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540, and a launcher mounting portion. The cylinder insertion opening 501f that penetrates the front and rear on the right side in front view of the portion 501e and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and the front and rear penetrates on the lower left side in front view of the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501g that faces the body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620 and the body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. A cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating in the front and rear direction at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base main body 501a in a front view, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j rotatably attached to the rear main body 501a is formed near the upper and lower end portions of the rear end of the base body 501a at the left end in front view, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 The upper hinge mounting portion 501k and the lower hinge mounting portion 501l are provided.

On the body frame base 501, a game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. .. The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-shaped guide main body 502a extending leftward and rightward, protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends rightward from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are projecting, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the front and rear ends of the guide main body 502a that penetrate through the front and rear and A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Has been formed. The attachment shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically in the vicinity of the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. This allows the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 includes a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) to which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. In the state where the guide body 502a of the guide body 502a is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side, the left-right direction of the plurality of through holes 502d formed at the upper and lower end sides of the guide body 502a is It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted through the pair of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and in the state where the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are rearward. (See FIG. 84(a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated so as to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (desirably α/3≧β). (See FIG. 84(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 becomes larger as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α becomes larger, but stops increasing when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 is not provided. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the.

Further, since the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened, when the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back by 180 degrees changes to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 acts due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the crease, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is prevented. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is located closer to the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to move toward the door frame hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axial center) side of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and is centered on the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, rather than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. An angle at which a tangent line to a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be surely closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) along with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main frame]
The body frame upper hinge member 510 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical protrusion upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 511. A main body frame upper hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the up-down direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a front view in a horizontally extending portion, and has an upper hinge hole 511a for a door frame for pivotally supporting the upper door frame hinge assembly 120. I have it.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Body frame under hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 arranged at an upper distance from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and also has a lower portion. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3 extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion. , Are provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge attaching portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. To be The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in a plan view whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded mold material.

In the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end, the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 is restricted from moving forward and downward. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85(b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for driving into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength according to the turning angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is attached to the launching device mounting portion 501e of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 and a flat plate-shaped launching base 541, and is attached to the rear surface of the right side of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front. From the vicinity of the tip of the hammer 543, a firing solenoid 542 having a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends through the firing base 541 and extending forward, a batting hammer 543 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, A launch rail 544 attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll is provided.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in the state where the handle 182 is operated, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength according to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is driven into the game area 5a by being guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544.

Note that, due to the hitting strength of the game ball B and the like, if the hit game ball B does not reach within the game area 5a, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the space between them, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 86(b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with a width in the front-rear direction being substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in front view that is substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a and extending downward downward, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. From above to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a back plate upper part 551d, and from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right side and extending to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width. The back plate left part 551e, the inner plate part 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left part 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate part 551b, and the front part to the right side of the lower side of the left plate part 551b. The bottom plate portion 551g extends to a position substantially the same as the right side of the left back plate 551e, and the connecting plate portion 551h connects the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open inward of the front and the L shape.

As for the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b is located above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow recessed portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the dispensing base portion 551 A unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached, which projects rightward at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front.

The dispensing base unit 550 is mounted on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is opened upward. A tank rail 553, which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in the shape of a groove opened upward, is provided.

In addition, the payout base unit 550 is installed on the upper end of the tank rail 553 while being spaced apart from the first rail cover 554, which is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and is leftward from the first rail cover 554 in a front view. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate 551a. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is diagonal from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and rearward, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one from the depth that is several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. An opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height on the left end side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower at various angles. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 has a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with respect to an axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By rectifying the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B which is circulating in two stages by the rectifying piece 556a and rectifying it so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side, inside the tank rail 553. Even if the height becomes low, it does not block the ball.

The ball stopper member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and by sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side on the downstream side.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the part of the payout base 551 extending to the left and right. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87(a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 87(b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 88(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 88(b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570, which guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 for paying out one by one, an upper tank ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper tank ball path unit. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow and a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and in a normal state. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated to the upper full ball path unit. The game ball B is discharged to the 600 side.

The upper tank ball path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 which has a guiding path 570a extending in a meandering shape in which the game ball B can flow, and which is open to the front, and closes the front side of the guiding unit base 571. The flat-shaped guide passage front lid 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball cutting detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of the flag (see FIG. 92).

In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front lid 572 are formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide the guide path. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering shape while repeatedly being folded back and forth between the widths of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the flow direction in which the game ball B flows. It can be guided in a line.

The movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570 such that the movable piece member 573 can advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. More specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an upper portion of the movable piece member 573 around an axis extending in the front and rear direction at a right outer side portion of the guide passage 570a, and a part of a lower end thereof projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. Is formed. The movable piece member 573 is in a state where the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is retracted from the inside of the guide passage 570a by the game ball B coming into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, and is not protruding. Becomes

The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 projects into the guide passage 570a, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is the discharging passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guide passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken along the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90(a) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear center of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA of (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear side.

The payout device 580 is a box-shaped open to the rear and has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow, and a payout device main body 581 having a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and payout. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and a rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshed with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device front cover 583; , A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and meshes with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front cover 583. A payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that integrally rotate with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582, and project into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear side. The ball-removing movable piece 592, which is attached to the ball-removing path 580b so as to be openable and closable at a portion branched from the dispensing path 580a by the lid 582, and the ball-removing movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-removing path 580b is closed. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 are provided with a ball removing lever 593 that is slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically in a plan view. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position closer to the left from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward by about 1/3 of the total height from the top so that it gradually moves to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly rightward and downward from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width, and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after being bent to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B with the outer circumference of the payout blade 589. Is formed in a circular arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in rear view with respect to the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

The ball passage passage 580b branches at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view, and in the rear view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the payout passage movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B. A main body side guide wall 581a protruding rearward and forward from each other so as to form a narrower gap, and formed so as to be continuous with the left side wall of the payout passage 580a and the ball passage passage 580b in rear view. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball-removing passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend rearward at a position at a height of about 1/3 from the top in a rear view. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly form the side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-moving movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side in rear view of a part of the payout device body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front cover 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout vane 589 is provided with three vane pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the side wall of the payout passage and the side wall of the payout passage in a portion that extends from the upper side in the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in rear view. In addition, it projects into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 is provided with a ball accommodating portion 589b which is recessed toward the center side with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B between the three vane pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be stored in the ball storage portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the gaming ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the game ball B stored in the ball storage portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by a payout device rear cover 582 and a payout device front cover 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 when viewed from the rear when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball-removable movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-removable movable piece 592 is bent in a V shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The hollow movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the up and down direction in the rear view left side near the upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592. The ball pull-out lever 593 partially penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the projecting portion. When the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the lower end, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 593 can contact the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear can be restricted. The ball removing passage 580b can be closed by the ball removing movable piece 592. Further, when the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

When the ball-removing lever 593 is raised to make the ball-removing movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state of connecting beads on the upstream side of the ball-removing movable piece 592, has a ball-removing movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a in a straight line, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that restricts the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is closer to the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down sooner.

Thus, in the state in which the ball-removing movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball-removing passage 580b, so the ball-removing movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-removing passage 580b. Although the game ball B will come into contact with the lower end side of the game ball vigorously, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since the ball-removing passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the contact force causes the ball-removing movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball-removing passage 580b. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the removal passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball removal movable piece 592 by the game ball B. It is possible to suppress deterioration of the durability and breakage of the piece 592.

From this, since it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball-removing movable piece 592, it is possible to discharge more game balls B to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-removing passage 580b more quickly, and thus pachinko. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer to each other than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball-removing movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-removing passage 580b, the ball-removing movable piece 592 connects the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the space, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball-removing movable piece 592, the gap is larger than that of the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

Then, by blocking the outward movement of the game ball B between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball removing movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball-ball moving movable piece 592, the ball-ball movable piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and the main body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably flowed to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full-ball path unit 600 is attached from below to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550. The upper tank ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower tank ball path unit 610. The upper tank bulb path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601. The upper full tank base 601 is attached to the rear side and has a front open box. The upper full tank cover 602, and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 projects rightward from the right side in a front view and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting a back cover.

Further, the upper tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end in front view on the upper surface and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of its overall width and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of its overall height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal delivery passage 600c that extends downward from the left side in a front view from the center in the left-right direction of the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and opens downward on the lower surface, adjacent to the upper ordinary delivery passage 600c and an upper portion. An upper tank discharge passage 600d that extends downward from the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and opens upwards near the right end in front view on the upper surface and is substantially vertical downward. And an upper ball-removing passage 600e that opens downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper tank full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are arranged side by side and open downward. In the state where the upper full-ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a opens immediately below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e is opened immediately below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B discharged (dispensed) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is discharged downward from either of the above. In addition, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removing passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower portion of the upper full tank ball path unit 600. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper tank ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side becomes lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower tank full ball path unit 610 includes a lower normal dispensing passage 610a, a lower tank dispensing passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A payout passage opening/closing door 613 that can open and close a downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 in a direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. And a biasing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank ball path unit 610, a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in order from the left as viewed from the front on the upper surface of the portion extending upward of the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank discharge passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal discharge passage 610a. The lower ball passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b in front view, and opens rightward in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614. (Opening) is closed. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape whose center view is the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 as the front view, and the front end face approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction as it approaches. It is inclined so as to project forward. The operating protrusion 613 a is formed so as to contact the door opening/closing contact part 150 f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

In the state where the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are respectively installed in the upper fullfiller passage 610c. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d is the lower full tank payout passage 610b. And the game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball-removing passage 600e flows through the lower ball-removing passage 610c.

Further, the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full-ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 that is opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, in a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is brought into contact with the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are in an open state, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613. Rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branching portion. Further, in the lower tank ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 that is opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of a ball cut by the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied/stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. In a state where the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout blade 589. Becomes

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it is understood that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout blade 589 in the clockwise direction in the rear view, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout blade in the payout passage 580a. It is released downstream from 589. Then, the game ball B discharged from the payout vane 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full-ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball delivery path unit 600 passes through the upper ball storing passage 600b and is arranged immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full-ball path unit 610 and the through-ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and then the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in FIG.

When a lot of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side are reached. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full-ball path unit 600 communicating with each other. Then, when the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the inside of the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. While the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. After that, the game ball B received in the full tank receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper bowl 201 is filled with the game balls B and further game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower bowl 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, when the game balls B are further dispensed, the lower plates are discharged. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 becomes a non-detected state.

When the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the ascending end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball-removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball-removing movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the part of the ball-moving movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down abuts against the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball-moving movable piece 592, and therefore the ball-moving movable piece 592. Is less likely to be damaged.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 has an upper ball removing passage 600e of the upper tank ball passage unit 600 and a lower ball removing passage 610c of the lower tank ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guiding part 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving part 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the outside of the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall). (Island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 93(b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the bottom rear side. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each major configuration and seen from the back. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear side. The base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, the payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear side.

The speaker unit 620a is directed forward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621, which is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened to the front. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that is formed by a plurality of slits that extend in the front-rear direction and extend vertically near the left end in front view, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b that is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, and extends diagonally downward and rearward. And an open connection portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass sound.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion that is the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes the most to the rear. Are formed so that the protrusion of the is small. As a result, a space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 viewed from the front can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses a sound output rearward from the body frame speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front concave portion 621b bulging forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front in the speaker cover 621. Therefore, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as the speaker box 623 moves to the right. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the amount becomes small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connecting cylinder part 43 a so that the connecting portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is provided. And the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, on the rear side of the body frame speaker 622, the enclosure 624 having a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound output to the front through the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side in front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connecting portion 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connection cylinder portion 43a, in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622, the lower outer frame assembly 40 is not particularly damped in the low frequency range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, the sound is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is transmitted to the dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the speaker 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and it is possible to output a large sound with a deep bass sound even if the body frame speaker 622 has a small diameter.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass. As a result, a sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200 and a sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are provided. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 has a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b, and a speaker box 623. Further, a through cylinder 623a which communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. When assembled in the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. A rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball guide part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving part that receives the game ball B that is discharged downward from the game board 5 that is open upward in the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball guide part 627. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 through which the game ball B that has passed through the ball pulling-out guide portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is discharged downward.

An upstream end of the ball drop guiding part 627 is opened to the left at the upper part of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end is opened to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving part 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball drop guiding portion 627 faces the lower end of the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 so that the opening at the upstream end thereof coincides with the downstream end opening. The game ball B discharged from the ball removing passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long right and left. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball removal guiding portion 627 at the front end, and is inclined so as to decrease toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by the ball removal guiding unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the discharge is performed downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a lower bass richer than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d is a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (see FIG. 97)). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board or the like of the game board 5. Then, the designated number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that a trace of opening and closing remains. As a result, it is possible to detect an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 and enhance the deterrence against an illegal act.

The interface unit 620e covers the rear side of the interface board 635 and the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 of the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634. An interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The substrate base 634 is attached to a rear surface of the speaker box 623, which is located behind the main body frame speaker 622 and is most protruded rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (on the body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The right side of the back cover 640 in front view is attached to the rear end of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically and rotatably around an axis extending vertically, and the left side thereof is the payout base 551. Are attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back cover 551d of the payout base 551 is assembled to the body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating forward and backward and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 98(b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. Door frame hooks 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the work hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653.

In addition, the locking unit 650 is more effective than the lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 is provided which protrudes forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the locking unit 650 assembled in the main body frame 4, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 to rotate the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 at the front end. The rotation of the key, which is engaged with the transmission member 133 and is inserted into the key hole 132, is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality of (two) outer hooks 652 are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, whereby a plurality of lock units 650 are transmitted through the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in the front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward, and the outer frame 2 is disengaged from the main body frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 cause the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the lock state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. 99(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99(b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 99(a). FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. 101(a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled to a ball tank, and FIG. 101(b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101(a) which is disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing a region where game balls overflowing from a ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame flow. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the bypass passage in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as seen from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is detachable from and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shape attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank 553; a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; A ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 for paying out the game ball B to the player side. Equipped with.

The ball tank 552 is formed in a quadrangular shape in a plan view extending in the left-right direction, and has a bottom wall 552a inclined so that the left side thereof becomes lower in a front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape with the upper side opened. Has been done. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f that is cut out from above the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end portion side of the left side wall 552d in the front wall 552b toward the end portion on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side) by about 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction. Is formed over the entire length.

The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side thereof extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream side to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball B. Have The main guide portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left side in front view. In addition, the main guiding portion 553a extends from the right end to the position of about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end in the plan view, and then to the left. It is formed in a crank shape that extends obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extends from there to the left end in parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. .. The tank rail 553 has a main guide portion 553a in which a portion of the main guide portion 553a extending from the left end to the right in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction extends to the upper end with the same width. The cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are attached to close the upper side. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the site where the upper side is closed, and at the downstream end the game ball B is formed. Is formed at a height at which only one can flow (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged so that a plurality of the game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b which bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and whose width direction narrows from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. By the bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. From this, the tank rail 553 can arrange the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction becomes a line as it goes toward the downstream side and the lower side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the bulging portion 553b is slightly separated at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b in the tank rail 553. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed such that the curved curvature is larger on the downstream side than on the upstream side. From this, in the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b that is curved three-dimensionally, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. Since it changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spherical burrs in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is less likely to disperse, the game ball B inside is constantly pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and causing ball clogging (ball clogging). On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b is different depending on the position of the game ball B, and therefore flows through the inside. By dispersing the pressing directions of the plurality of game balls B to be played, the pressed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball clogging) can be made difficult to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clogging (ball clogging) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be increased. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit, etc., you can check the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc., with the game board 5 still attached to the main frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the effect of.

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. Extending toward the left (to the left), in order to return the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m that extends and the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m extend rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to above the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m while being inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower. And a detour passage 552g for guiding.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on the outer sides of the bypass passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. It is provided at a position lower than the overflow portion 551j on the side opposite to the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open. And an outer terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connecting terminals 558a capable of connecting electric wiring from the rear side and an upper side of the plurality of electric wire connecting terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and an upper surface thereof is an overflow surface portion. The terminal cover 551k extends horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is a flat plate shape from a position lower than the upper side of the rear surface of the base main body 501a, which is formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape, from the upper side to 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B to a rear side. Has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of one-third of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap having a distance about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B with the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The left upper portion is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both outer sides in the left and right direction of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o, respectively, and extends in the front-rear direction in the shape of a strip plate. A plurality of ribs 501p arranged in a row at a narrower interval than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane such that the rear end left corner is slightly lower in front view.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between and is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, in a front view, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501m. The left end of the right-hand side part of the bypass passage 552g coincides with the left-right direction of the bypass passage 552g, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right-side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Note that, hereinafter, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and has a front end inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and a rear end lowering 552h. And a weir portion that extends upward from the end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. As for the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g, the left end side (the weir 552i side) of the rear end side in the front view extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552, and the left end side thereof. It extends obliquely so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

When the bypass passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is along the front end side of a portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and extending obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. It is extended. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided to the rear by the bypass passage 552g changes from the slanted rear end so that the flow direction is perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is formed at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction (perpendicular direction) substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball clogging within 553 to occur.

The detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so that the rear end thereof moves rearward as it goes toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553. Therefore, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When discharged, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side where the tank rail 553 has a narrow width, and the width. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball debris in the tank rail 553 by discharging the gas to a wide area.

In addition, the part that guides the game ball B by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. In this portion, the game ball B that lurks under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552. For this reason, at a position behind the bypass passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) is never exceeded. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked on the upper side on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, and thus the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received at the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending from the position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d to the right inside the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j from the left end of the front wall 552b to about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b in front view. Approximately 1/9 of the total length extends obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position of about ½ of the entire length of the left side wall 552d in the front-rear direction, and then extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c in parallel with the left side wall 552d It is formed in a shape extending in parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the entire length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

The ball tank 552 has a straight line connecting the right end of the guide surface 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end of the right end of the front wall 552b and the end of the rear wall 552c in plan view. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate vertically. Further, the ball tank 552 has a flat plate-shaped flange that extends laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the dam portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the heights of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper edges of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the main body frame base 501). Are formed higher than the upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o.

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled with each other, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and a portion that extends obliquely on the left side thereof and a portion that extends straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located behind the ball tank 552 (projection). )doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharging portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The discharge portion 551j in the ball tank 552 is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that the height becomes lower stepwise toward the rear from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. A position that extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553 and then becomes leftward along the tank rail 553 to be higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to the rear after being extended to a nearby position).

The external terminal plate 558 is attached to the rear surface in a state where a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction. The electric wire connecting terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion is opened by operating the lever and the tip of the electric wiring can be gripped. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are arranged so that the overflow end surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g become lower on the rear end side, as indicated by white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are inclined so that the rear end right corner is lower and the rear end left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined such that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a becomes lower.

Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, the overflow portion 552f having the lowest height of the outer peripheral upper edge is crossed. Can be flown to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface 501m, and at the same time it can be flowed from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent further increase of the game ball B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball crush) due to the engagement between the game balls B.

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is blocked in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side that is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from pressing each other strongly in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

Further, at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is made higher than that of the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m and flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is on the left side on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to make a ball. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Since it is also high, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) with respect to the bypass passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is changed from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear side. The flow can be made to flow in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pressing each other and being bitten by the directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B becoming uneven, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B occurs. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom portion of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that they are lined up in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are lined up, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the region where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, since a wide bulging portion 553b capable of arranging a plurality of game balls B is provided, the game discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably exhibited.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since the game balls B are changed so as to match with each other, the plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a line in the width direction as they go toward the downstream side in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end, so the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) The plurality of gaming balls B that are stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction are circulated to the downstream side through a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, so that the number of stages in the height direction is reduced to form one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, by the tank rail 553, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) while being aligned in a line.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be located far from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it is possible to make it difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. However, there is no possibility that a short-circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring will occur due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. It is possible to make it difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces on the overflow surface section 501m, or to make it difficult to fall from the rear side even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Furthermore, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 104) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. Thereby, the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j can be prevented from being pressed in the downstream direction with respect to the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. It can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and gets on the left step 501n and the right step 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g by the inclination thereof, and a problem occurs when the game ball B spills out of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

Further, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B is configured to pass below the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game ball that is stacked on the upper side in the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, in the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the site where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. FIG. 107 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 108 is a front view showing the inside of a game area in which game balls are distributed on the game board. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate portion which give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. A 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided (see FIG. 108). Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning in the game area 5a. It is for playing a game in which the operation of driving the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed so that the mouth 2006 or the like can be received or passed.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, which defines the outer periphery of the game region 5a and whose outer shape is a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and defines the rear end of the game region 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game balls B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 108). Further, the game board 5 is mounted on the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a game ball B mounted on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, in which a game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 97 and 125, etc.) for controlling the contents.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel. A front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of 1100 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder (not shown) is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so as to accept the game balls B that have been driven into the playing area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the playing areas. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in 5a, and a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B, The second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in which the game ball B can be received according to the result of the normal lottery that is selected by the game ball B passing through the gate section 2003. A first big winning opening 2005 and a second big winning opening 2006, in which either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, which is drawn by accepting the game ball B, allows the game ball B to be accepted. Equipped with.

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and has a start opening unit 2100 having a first start opening 2002 and one general winning opening 2001. , A side unit 2200 having two general winning openings 2001 attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side in the front view of the starting opening unit 2100, and a vertical center at the right end in the front view inside the game area 5a. A gate unit 2300 that has a gate portion 2003 that is attached to the lower side, and one general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 that are attached to the approximate center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. It is provided with a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a first special winning opening 2005 and a second special winning opening 2006.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (panel holder) and has a box-like shape with an open front, and a square opening that is closed by detachably attaching the effect display device 1600 from the rear side to the rear wall. And a back box 3010 (see FIGS. 11 and 12), a lower movable effect unit 3100, an upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and an upper front movable effect unit 3300, which are mounted in the back box 3010. Equipped with.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in the front view, and extends in an arc shape along a clockwise circumferential direction, and extends to an upper right diagonal position after passing through a center upper end in the left and right direction in front view. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to a diagonally upper left in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to decrease toward the rear.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stopper 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the inner rail 1002 and the front rail. A backflow prevention member that is rotated in a rotating direction to be rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front component member 1000 is provided with an out port 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding part 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in a front view in the frame. The game ball B guided to the rear by the out guide portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes the outer side of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower ends, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the gap between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch portion 1010 coincides with a notch portion of a panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion penetrate the lower full tank path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 and 100. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and which is formed of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel panel 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder (not shown) mounted on the rear side of the front component member 1000 and on the rear surface of which the back unit 3000 is mounted.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a and is formed with an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

The panel holder of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a through hole having an inner side penetrating in the front-rear direction with substantially the same size as the game area 5a. ing.

Further, the panel holder includes a notch portion that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1010 to penetrate the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the tank ball path unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper side and front side are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This substrate holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the state of being assembled to the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

In the substrate holder 1200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharging portion 1201 is located directly above the discharging ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008, and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and the bottom surface. The discharge portion 1201 formed in the above can be discharged to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 contains a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 125) that controls the game contents and the payout of the game balls B, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And are equipped with.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, a trace of opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, the unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening/closing, and the deterrence of the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2301, a second starting opening sensor 2511, a first big winning opening sensor 2512, a second big winning opening sensor 2513, a starting opening solenoid 2514, and a first attacker solenoid 2515. , Second attacker solenoid 2516, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002, and magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400, the detailed illustration of which is omitted in the shin, includes a status indicator composed of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and two for displaying the normal lottery result selected by the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a normal symbol display composed of LEDs and a normal reservation display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003.

In addition, the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result lottery by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002 The second special lottery result which is drawn by the first special reserve number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting slot 2004 and the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. It is provided with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings for receiving the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. ing.

Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit", the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening/closing pattern of at least one of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 ( A round indicator including five LEDs for displaying the number of rounds) is provided.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on/off, blinking, and the like of the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 125. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the effect presented to the player based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box (not shown) that houses the peripheral control board 1510. And are equipped with. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the approximate center. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

[5-8. Table unit]
The table unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. The table unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end partially opens the opening of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a, and a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open at a different position in the area 5a so as to receive the game ball B, and a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B. , To the second starting port 2004 or the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. The first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in which the game ball B can be received in at least one of the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by receiving the game ball B. , Are provided.

A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part in the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowest end in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. The gate portion 2003 is arranged near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. The general winning opening 2001 on the right side is arranged immediately below the gate portion 2003. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the lower left side of the gate portion 2003 and at a height slightly lower than the general winning port 2001 on the right side. The first special winning opening 2005 is arranged below the second starting opening 2004 and slightly below the first starting opening 2002. The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged at a position slightly lower to the left of the first special winning opening 2005.

The table unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1008 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting port unit 2100 having one general winning port 2001 and a first starting port 2002, and a starting port. A side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has two general winning openings 2001 and a right end in the front view inside the game area 5a with respect to the center in the vertical direction. A gate unit 2300 attached to the lower side and having a gate portion 2003, and a general winning opening 2001, a second start opening 2004, which are attached to the upper center of the game area 5a in the approximate center of the front view. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a first winning opening 2005 and a second winning opening 2006, and a transparent front production unit 2600 mounted so as to close the inside of the frame of the center winning 2500. And are equipped with.

The gate unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is arranged at the right end in the front view in the game area 5a, and is arranged lower than the center in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The gate unit 2300 includes a gate portion 2003 in which the game balls B are always allowed to pass one by one in the vertical direction, and a gate sensor 2301 for detecting the game balls B that have passed through the gate portion 2003.

In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the rear unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001, and then to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is discharged. The game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 is sent to the rear unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. To be done.

Also, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2511, and is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2512 or the second big winning hole sensor 2513, and then to the rear side of the game panel 1100. It is sent and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8a. Center goods]
The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. FIG. 109 is a front view of a center accessory and a table production unit in the table unit of the game board. The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged substantially in the center in the front view within the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the lower movable effect unit 3100 and the upper front movable effect unit provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. 3300 and the like can be seen from the front. The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side projecting forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B hit in the game area 5a is in the frame. You can't break into.

The center accessory 2500 includes one general winning opening 2001 arranged in the lower right corner of the outer periphery of the frame when viewed from the front, a second starting opening 2004 arranged slightly below the general winning opening 2001, and a second starting opening 2004. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged below the second starting opening 2004, and the second big winning opening 2006 is arranged slightly below the first big winning opening 2005 to the left. Further, the center accessory 2500 can release the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 and the warp entrance 2501 that is open to the game ball B in the game area 5a on the outer peripheral surface on the left side in front view. It is provided with a warp outlet 2502 opened in the frame and a stage 2503 capable of releasing the game ball B emitted from the warp outlet 2502 into the game area 5a after rolling in the lateral direction.

The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed, and corresponds to a position directly above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1110), it is formed such that the position of the substantially center in the left-right direction is the lowest. This stage 2503 is inclined so that the lowest part in the center in the left-right direction is inclined toward the front, and the game ball B can be discharged from this part into the game area 5a. In the center accessory 2500, the height of the lowest part of the stage 2503 is substantially the same as the height of the second starting port 2004.

In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the central portion in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 (the top) is located directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. Thereby, when the game ball B is discharged from the center of the stage 2503, it is received in the first starting opening 2002 with an extremely high probability.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, the second start port sensor 2511, and the game ball B received in the first special winning port 2005. It is provided with a winning hole sensor 2512 and a second winning hole sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the second winning hole 2006 (see FIG. 125). Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a starting opening solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second starting opening 2004 according to the result of the ordinary drawing that is drawn by the passage of the game ball B of the gate portion 2003, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting. The first attacker solenoid 2515 for opening and closing the first special winning opening 2005 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the mouth 2004, and the first start opening 2002 or the second The second attacker solenoid 2516 that opens and closes the second special winning opening 2006 in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004.

In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the right side of the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction and the upper portion of the right surface in the front view are the outer periphery (outer rail 1001 and right rail 1005) of the game area 5a. In between, a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed. Further, in the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 are arranged in the lower right corner when viewed from the front. The portion of the lower right corner as viewed from the front extends to the lower right corner in the game area 5a, and forms a space between the portion of the lower right corner and the upper portion of the right side surface. The gate unit 2300 is arranged in the space.

Therefore, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so as to flow on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed), the game ball B can be passed through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. At the same time, it is possible to accept the game ball B to the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 which are open (open) with a high probability.

[5-8b. Table production unit]
The table rendering unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 109 to 113 and the like. FIG. 110 is a side cross-sectional view of the front effect unit along with the center accessory cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right. FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LEDs in the front effect unit and the reflective recesses of the front light guide plate. FIG. 112 is a front view showing a light emitting mode of the front light guide plate. FIG. 113 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front light guide plate of the front production unit is made to emit light.

The front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is a transparent flat plate-shaped front light guide plate 2610 that closes the inside of the center accessory 2500, a reflector 2620 attached to the upper side of the front light guide plate 2610, and an upper surface of the reflector 2620. A front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 on which a plurality of LEDs 2630 that emit light toward the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610 are mounted, and a center accessory that covers the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 and the reflector 2620 from the front. And a front cover 2650 attached to the 2500.

The front light guide plate 2610 of the front effect unit 2600 is formed from a transparent light guide plate main body 2611 and a back surface of the light guide plate main body 2611, and any one of a plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 on the upper surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. A plurality of fine reflection concave portions 2613 that reflect the incident light forward. The plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610 are divided into four from a first specific light incident portion 2612a, a second specific light incident portion 2612b, a third specific light incident portion 2612c, and a fourth specific light incident portion 2612d. It is configured. The first specific light incident part 2612a, the second specific light incident part 2612b, the third specific light incident part 2612c, and the fourth specific light incident part 2612d are divided into eight equal parts in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) on the upper surface of the light guide plate body 2611. Then, they are arranged in two turns in order from the left to the right (the order in which the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d returns to the beginning and becomes the first specific light incident portion 2612a).

The reflection concave portion 2613 has a flat surface that extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 and is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate body 2611. .. The reflection recess 2613 is recessed in a pent roof-shaped triangle. The reflection concave portion 2613 can reflect the light incident from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 in a direction substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate body 2611. Further, the reflection concave portion 2613 can reflect the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 in the direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate body 2611.

As a result, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 111, when light is incident from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, it is reflected by the reflection concave portion 2613 toward the front front of the light guide plate body 2611 (direction perpendicular to the paper surface). However, the reflective recess 2613 is seen to emit light by the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 111, when light is incident from the non-corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, the light is reflected by the reflection concave portion 2613 in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate body 2611, From the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, it appears that the reflective recess 2613 does not emit light.

In the present embodiment, as the reflection concave portion 2613, a shape in which the reflection concave portion 2613 is recessed in a triangle and extends in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting with the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 is shown. However, it is not limited to the above, and may be any as long as it extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting with the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612.

The plurality of reflection concave portions 2613 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612, and the plurality of first reflection concave portions 2613a and the second specific light incident portion 2612b corresponding to the first specific light incident portion 2612a. Corresponding to the plurality of second reflection concave portions 2613b, a plurality of third specific light incident portions 2612c corresponding to a plurality of third reflection concave portions 2613c, and a plurality of fourth specific light incident portions 2612d corresponding to a plurality of fourth reflection concave portions 2612d. And a concave portion 2613d.

Further, the front light guide plate 2610 has a plurality of patterns 2614 capable of emitting and displaying in different modes by reflecting light forward by a specific group of the reflective recesses 2613 among the plurality of reflective recesses 2613. There is. The plurality of patterns 2614 include a first pattern 2614a including only the plurality of first reflection recesses 2613a, a second pattern 2614b including only the plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b, and a third including only the plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c. It is composed of a pattern 2614c and a fourth pattern 2614d composed of only a plurality of fourth reflection recesses 2613d.

As shown in FIGS. 109 and 112, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are concentrically arranged in order from the outer side to the center (after the fourth pattern 2614d). Are arranged so as to return to the beginning and become the first pattern 2614a).

The reflector 2620 has a fixed recess 2621 into which the upper end of the front light guide plate 2610 is inserted. By inserting the front light guide plate 2610 into the fixed recess 2621, the reflector 2620 can sandwich the front side and the back side of the front light guide plate 2610, and the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned without rattling. it can. On the bottom surface (upper surface) of the fixed recessed portion 2621, a through hole 2622 penetrating vertically is formed in a portion corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 2630 mounted on the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640.

The front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 has a strip plate shape extending right and left, and a plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted on a portion of the lower surface thereof which is directly above the fixing recessed portion 2621 of the reflector 2620. The plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted (attached) to the portions corresponding to the plurality of through holes 2622 of the reflector 2620, respectively. The front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is formed so that a plurality of LEDs 2630 face downward through the through holes 2622 by being attached to the upper surface of the reflector 2620.

The plurality of LEDs 2630 are attached so as to correspond to the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2630 includes a first LED group 2630a corresponding to the first specific light entering section 2612a, a second LED group 2630b corresponding to the second specific light entering section 2612b, and a third specific light entering section 2612c. And a fourth LED group 2630d corresponding to the fourth specific light entering portion 2612d. The first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d divide a plurality of LEDs 2630 arranged in the left-right direction into eight equal parts in the left-right direction, and from left to right. Are sequentially arranged in two turns (the order in which the fourth LED group 2630d returns to the beginning and becomes the first LED group 2630a). In the present embodiment, each of the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d has six LEDs 2630.

Next, the light emission effect by the front effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2630a of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate body 2611 from the first specific light incident part 2612a, and is reflected to the front by the first reflection recess 2613a, and the remaining first light is reflected. Since the second reflection concave portion 2613b, the third reflection concave portion 2613c, and the fourth reflection concave portion 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the first reflection concave portion 2613a appears to be visible to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1, The first pattern 2614a composed of the plurality of first reflection recesses 2613a can emit light (see FIG. 112(a)).

When the second LED group 2630b of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate body 2611 from the second specific light incident portion 2612b, and is reflected to the front by the second reflection recess 2613b, and the remaining first light is reflected. Since the one reflection concave portion 2613a, the third reflection concave portion 2613c, and the fourth reflection concave portion 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the second reflection concave portion 2613b appears to be visible to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1, The second pattern 2614b composed of the plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b can emit light (see FIG. 112(b)).

When the third LED group 2630c of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light is incident on the inside of the light guide plate body 2611 from the third specific light incident part 2612c, and is reflected to the front by the third reflection recessed part 2613c, and the remaining part of the light is emitted. Since the one reflection concave portion 2613a, the second reflection concave portion 2613b, and the fourth reflection concave portion 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the third reflection concave portion 2613c appears to be shining to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The third pattern 2614c composed of the plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c can emit light (see FIG. 112(c)).

When the fourth LED group 2630d of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate main body 2611 from the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d, and is reflected to the front by the fourth reflection concave portion 2613d, while remaining light is emitted. Since the one reflection concave portion 2613a, the second reflection concave portion 2613b, and the third reflection concave portion 2613c are reflected to other than the front, only the fourth reflection concave portion 2613d appears to be visible to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1, The fourth pattern 2614d composed of the plurality of fourth reflective recesses 2613d can emit light (see FIG. 112(d)).

As described above, since the plurality of patterns 2614 arranged concentrically can each be made to emit light, the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be replaced by the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630c. When the LED group 2630d is made to emit light in order, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d can be made to emit light in this order, and there is a movement that spreads outward from the center. It is possible to perform a luminous effect such as animation.

On the other hand, when the plurality of LEDs 2630 are caused to emit light in the order of the fourth LED group 2630d, the third LED group 2630c, the second LED group 2630b, and the first LED group 2630a, the fourth pattern 2614d, the third pattern 2614c, and the second The pattern 2614b and the first pattern 2614a can be made to emit light in order, and a light-emission effect such as animation can be performed in which the user concentrates from the outside toward the center.

As described above, according to the front-face rendering unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns 2614 can be made to emit light by one front light guide plate 2610. It is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 can be located as close as possible to the player side, and a large space is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610. It can be easily secured. Therefore, a wide space can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610, so that the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. are provided on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. Can be arranged, which makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a good appearance in the game area 5a and having a high appealing power to the player, and in addition to the effect by the luminous display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable effect. By performing the movable effect by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like, it is possible to provide the player with various effects, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest. be able to.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 113, the front light guide plate 2610 causes a plurality of semitransparent patterns 2614 to emerge in the front of the effect unit, the ornament, and the effect display device 1600 due to the point emission of the plurality of reflective recesses 2613. Since it is possible to show a moving light emitting decoration like animation, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player who is familiar with the light emitting effect using the conventional light guide plate, and it is possible to surprise and entertain the player, It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since only the player who is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emitting display of the design 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610, the player can see the design 2614 from other players who are far from the front. The light-emitting display becomes difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the front light guide plate 2610 is being performed, and to prevent other players from paying attention. In addition to being able to play, it is possible to play the game without hesitation to other players, and it is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached so as to be sandwiched by the fixed recesses 2621 of the reflector 2620, the plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 are reliably positioned on the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610. can do. Thereby, each LED 2630 (the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, the fourth LED group 2630d) is arranged at a position corresponding to each specific light entering portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light from each LED 2630 can be reflected to the front front by the corresponding reflection recess 2613, and the corresponding pattern 2614 can be surely emitted.

Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in which the center accessory 2500 is attached in the center of the front view game area 5a, even if the pattern 2614 is displayed by the LED 2630, the light emission is achieved. The displayed pattern 2614 does not interfere with the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state, which makes it difficult to see the game. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust and to enjoy the game in a good state.

Further, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed recessed portion 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 are compared with the conventional case where two members are attached. It is possible to eliminate rattling between the LED and the front light guide plate 2610 and reliably position the plurality of LEDs 2630 at desired positions with respect to the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since the LED 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light entering portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the light from the LED 2630 can be surely emitted to the corresponding specific light entering portion 2612, and only the intended pattern 2614 is obtained. It is possible to reliably perform light emission display.

Further, by disposing the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 only on the upper side of the light guide plate body 2611, the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) is disposed only on the upper side of the light guide plate body 2611. The front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) does not surround the outer circumference of the light guide plate body 2611, and the front cover (frame body) is provided over the entire circumference of the light guide plate body 2611. Since it is possible to avoid partitioning the effect image and the decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged in, the player can easily see the effect image and the like, and the effect image can be displayed to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be made entertaining in a good state to suppress a decrease in interest, and a pachinko machine 1 having an open feeling can be provided because there is no frame-shaped partition in the game area 5a in a front view. It can be made attractive and appealing to the player with a good internal appearance.

Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620) can be obtained by aligning the periphery of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. Or a plurality of LEDs 2630) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, when the pattern 2614 is caused to emit light, the front light guide plate is displayed. It is possible to make a strong impact on a player who thought that 2610 does not exist and to be surprised, and to entertain the luminous display of a plurality of patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

Furthermore, since the front cover 2650 prevents the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflector 2620 from being seen from the player side, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the inside of the game area 5a from being deteriorated by the reflector 2620 and the like being visible. , The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 are hidden from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630, and thus the LEDs 2630 can be made less visible. By causing the pattern 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 to emit light, the player can be greatly surprised by the emission display that the player did not predict, and the emission display of the pattern 2614 can be enjoyed and the player Can be made to think that something is good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610, the front light guide plate 2610 emits light of a plurality of different patterns 2614 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600. Since it is possible to show the player a combined effect, it is possible to perform various effects by appropriately combining them, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired, and the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to entertain the player by the effect of, and to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, by displaying an effect image associated with a plurality of patterns 2614 that are light-emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, it is possible to give a sense of depth and a stereoscopic effect to the patterns 2614 that are light-emitted and displayed. It is possible to show the player an effect (display effect) capable of strongly attracting the player's interest, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the reflection concave portion 2613 has a triangular cross section and extends constantly, but the present invention is not limited to this. May have a polygonal shape and extend uniformly, or may have a curved cross section and extend uniformly.

The LED 2630 may have a single color or a full color. In addition, the plurality of patterns 2614 may be four or more, and the number of the specific light entering portions, the reflective recesses, and the LED groups can be appropriately selected according to the number of the patterns 2614.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 124. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the lower front center decorative body is made to emit light in the lower movable production unit, and FIG. 115 is a lower front center decorative body in which the lower central lifting base is raised in the lower movable production unit. FIG. 116 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the lower rear central decoration is illuminated, and FIG. 116 is a lower movable front and rear lower raising/lowering base, a lower left side raising/lowering base and a lower right side raising/lowering base are raised to lower front. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the central ornament, the lower rear central ornament, the lower left side ornament, and the lower right side ornament are illuminated. FIG. 117 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the game board is in the state of FIG. 116 and the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. In addition, FIG. 118 is a four-sided decoration, a left side rotation decoration, a left subside rotation decoration, a right side rotation decoration, and a right subside rotation decoration are developed in the lower movable effect unit, and the decoration portion of each surface is expanded. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decoration of FIG. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram that schematically shows the types (sizes) of the arrows displayed in the lower movable effect unit.

FIG. 120 is a front view of the game board shown with the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit lowered. 121 is an explanatory view schematically showing the drive mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 122 is an explanatory view showing the structure of the clutch mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit. FIG. 123 is a front view of the game board shown with the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit lowered. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the upper front movable decoration of the upper front movable effect unit.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder in the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting opening sensor for detecting the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. A magnetic sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 are provided (see FIG. 125).

The back unit 3000 is a box-shaped unit which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder and whose front is open. The back unit 3010 has a rectangular opening on the rear wall, and the effect display device 1600 faces forward. The lower movable effect unit 3100 attached to the lower part, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 attached to the upper part in the back box 3010, and the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 attached to the upper part in the back box 3010. And the upper front movable effect unit 3300 which is installed.

[5-9a. Lower movable production unit]
The lower movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 119 and the like. The lower movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the lower part in the back box 3010, and a part thereof is located in front of the lower part of the effect display device 1600. The lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a lower front central decoration unit 3110 attached below the effect display device 1600 near the front end of the back box 3010, and a lower central effect arranged behind the lower front central decoration unit 3110. A unit 3120, and a lower left side effect unit 3150 and a lower right side effect unit 3170, which are respectively arranged on the left and right sides of the lower central effect unit 3120, are provided.

The lower front central decoration unit 3110 is provided with a lower front central decoration body 3111 having a trapezoidal shape (inverted isosceles triangle shape with flattened vertices) that is narrowed downward and having a light-transmitting property. The lower front central decoration unit 3110 is located behind the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 when assembled to the game board 5. The lower front central decorative body 3111 can be illuminated and decorated by the lower central decorative substrate of the lower central effect unit 3120.

The lower central effect unit 3120 is attached to the lower central elevating base 3121 which is attached to the rear case 3010 so as to be able to ascend and descend behind the lower front central ornamental unit 3110, and the front face of the lower central elevating base 3121. And a lower central decorative board 3122 having a lower rear central decorative body 3122 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the rear side of the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and capable of emitting light toward the front (illustrated Is omitted) and a central movable unit 3125 attached to the upper part of the lower central lifting base 3121.

Although not shown, the lower central effect unit 3120 includes a unit base attached to the back box 3010, and a pair of elevating guides attached to the unit base for vertically guiding the lower central elevating base. A rod-shaped arm member that is attached to the unit base so as to be rotatable about an axis whose base end extends in the front-rear direction, a sliding pin that is attached to the tip of the arm member and is inserted into a slit of the lower center elevating base 3121, and an arm member. And a lower central lifting drive motor for rotating the.

Although not shown, the lower central elevating base 3121 has a slit that extends to the left and right, and a sliding pin attached to the tip of the arm member is slidably inserted into this slit. The lower center elevating base 3121 is driven by the lower center elevating drive motor between a lower position where the whole is behind the lower front central decoration 3111 and an upper position where the whole is higher than the lower front central decoration 3111. It is mounted so that it can be raised and lowered.

The lower rear central decorative body 3122 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle and has a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The lower rear central decorative body 3122 can be illuminated and decorated by the light emission of the LED of the lower central decorative substrate. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the lower central decoration board so that each of the light emitting regions 3122a of the lower rear central decoration body 3122 can be independently illuminated and decorated, and the lower central lifting base 3121 is raised. Sometimes, it is mounted so that light can be emitted toward the lower front central decoration body 3111 which is the lower side and the front side.

Although not shown in detail, the central movable unit 3125 has a plurality of mounting bases which are mounted on the upper end of the lower central lifting base 3121 at intervals in the left-right direction and each of which extends upward in a flat plate shape. A plurality of central rotation drive motors, which are respectively mounted on a plurality of mounting bases with their rotary shafts oriented in the left-right direction, and the rotary shafts of the respective central rotary drive motors. And a plurality of cube-shaped rotating ornaments 3126 that cover the. The plurality of rotary ornaments 3126 are rotatable by a central rotation drive motor about an axis extending in the left-right direction, and are arranged coaxially in the left-right direction. In addition, each of the rotating decorative bodies 3126 has different decorative portions 3127 formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 118). Each of the plurality of rotary decorations 3126 can be independently rotated by each central rotary drive motor.

Although not shown, the central movable unit 3125 is mounted on the upper surface of the lower central elevating base 3121 below each rotating decorative body 3126, and a plurality of central decorative units 3126 capable of emitting light toward each rotating decorative body 3126. A lower central upper surface decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted is provided. By appropriately causing the LEDs on the lower central upper surface decorative substrate to emit light, each rotating decorative body 3126 can be made to emit light.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 of the lower movable effect unit 3100 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like lower piece portion, and a flat plate-like side extending upward from the left end of the lower piece portion. It has a side portion and a flat plate-shaped upper side portion extending from the upper end of the side portion to the upper side of the lower piece portion to the right and shorter than the lower piece portion. When viewed from the left, the left unit base is mounted in the back box 3010, and a cylindrical guide whose lower end and upper end are respectively attached to the lower piece and the upper piece near the right side of the left unit base. A rod-shaped male screw that is rotatably mounted around a shaft extending vertically by the lower piece and upper piece of the left unit base so as to extend parallel to the shaft and the guide shaft, and has a male thread formed on the outer circumference. Member, a lower left side elevation base 3151 slidably attached to the guide shaft and having a nut screwed to the male screw member, and a lower portion attached to the left unit base for rotating the male screw member. The left side lifting drive motor, the lower left side decorative body 3152 which is attached to the front surface of the lower left side lifting base 3151 and has a light-transmitting property, and the right side surface of the lower left side decorative body 3152 which is mounted on the left side. A lower left side decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward are mounted.

The lower left side decorative body 3152 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3152a arranged in a row in the up-down direction. By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate, each light emitting region The 3152a can be independently light-emittered.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the upper part of the lower left side elevating base 3151 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and has a slider having a slit extending forward and backward, The lower left slide drive motor is attached to the rear side of the lower left side lift base 3151 so that the rotary shaft extends upward below the slider, and the base end side is attached to the rotary shaft of the lower left slide drive motor. And a cam member having a cylindrical sliding pin slidably inserted in the slit of the slider on the front end side that extends in the horizontal direction from the cage base end side.

Further, although not shown in detail, the lower left side effect unit 3150 has a mounting base mounted on a slider and extending upward in the form of a flat plate, and a rotating shaft directed to the left and right directions on the mounting base. A left side rotary drive motor is attached, and a cubic left side rotary ornament 3153 is attached to the rotary shaft of the left side rotary drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the left side rotary drive motor. The left side rotary decoration 3153 has different decorative portions 3154 formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 118). The left side rotary decoration 3153 is rotatable around a shaft extending left and right by a left side rotation drive motor.

Further, although not shown in detail, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached below the left side rotating decorative body 3153 on the upper surface of the slider, and light can be emitted toward the left side rotating decorative body 3153. A lower left side upper surface decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is provided. By appropriately causing the LEDs on the lower left side upper surface decorative substrate to emit light, the left side rotating decorative body 3153 can be made to emit light.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece portion of the left unit base, and has a sub-mounting base extending upward in a flat plate shape and a sub-mounting base. A left subside rotation drive motor that is installed with the rotation axis facing left and right, and a cubic left subside rotation that is installed on the rotation shaft of the left subside rotation drive motor and covers the outer circumference of the left subside rotation drive motor. And a decorative body 3155. The left sub-side rotating decoration body 3155 has different decoration portions 3156 formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 118). Further, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 can be rotated around an axis extending left and right by a left sub-side rotation drive motor.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached below the left sub side rotation decoration body 3155 on the upper surface of the upper piece part of the left unit base, and faces the left sub side rotation decoration body 3155. And a lower left sub-side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted. The left sub-side rotating decoration body 3155 can be made to emit light by appropriately causing the LEDs of the lower left sub-side upper surface decoration substrate to emit light.

The lower left side effect unit 3150 is assembled to the game board 5, and the left sub side rotation decoration body 3155 attached to the left unit base has a height such that the left side rotation decoration body 3153 can enter below. It is arranged at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotary decorations 3126 when the lower central elevating base 3121 of the central effect unit 3120 is positioned (raised) to the ascending end. In addition, the lower left side effect unit 3150, when the left sub side rotary ornament 3155 is assembled to the game board 5, the left side rotary ornament 3153 is located between the leftmost rotary ornament 3126 of the lower central effect unit 3120. There is a space left between them.

The lower left side effect unit 3150 rotates the male screw member by the lower left side elevating/lowering drive motor to move the left side rotating decorative body 3153 together with the slider via the lower left side elevating/lowering base 3151 and the lower central effector unit 3120. The lower center elevating base 3121 can be moved up and down between a descending position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decorative body 3126 in the descending position and an ascending position having the same height as the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155. In addition, the lower left side effect unit 3150 rotates the cam member by the lower left slide drive motor to move the left side rotating decorative body 3153 through the slider to the appearance position adjacent to and adjacent to the lower central effect unit 3120. It can be slid in the left-right direction between a retracted position in which about half is located below the left sub-side rotating decoration body 3155 away from the lower central effect unit 3120.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 of the lower movable effect unit 3100 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like lower piece portion, and a flat plate-like side extending upward from the right end of the lower piece portion. The front side of the unit base of the lower central performance unit 3120 has a side portion and an upper side portion of a flat shape extending from the upper ends of the side portions to the upper side of the lower piece portion and extending leftward shorter than the lower piece portion. The right unit base mounted in the back box 3010 in the right side of the view, and a columnar guide in which the lower end and the upper end are respectively attached to the lower piece portion and the upper piece portion near the left side of the side portion of the right unit base. A rod-shaped male screw that is attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically by the lower piece and upper piece of the right unit base so as to extend parallel to the shaft and the guide shaft, and has a male thread formed on the outer periphery. Member, a lower right side lifting base 3171 which has a nut screwed to the male screw member and is slidably attached to the guide shaft, and a lower portion which is attached to the right unit base and rotates the male screw member. A right side up-and-down drive motor, a lower right side ornamental body 3172 which is attached to the front surface of the lower right side up and down base 3171 and has a light-transmitting property, and a right side surface of the lower right side ornamental body 3172 which is attached to the right side. A lower right side decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward are mounted.

The lower right side decorative body 3172 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3172a arranged in a row in the up-down direction. Each of the 3172a can be independently illuminated.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the upper part of the lower right side elevating base 3171 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and has a slider having a slit extending forward and backward, The lower right slide drive motor is attached to the rear side of the lower right side lift base 3171 so that the rotation shaft extends upward below the slider, and the base end side is attached to the rotation shaft of the lower right slide drive motor. And a cam member having a cylindrical sliding pin slidably inserted in the slit of the slider on the front end side that extends in the horizontal direction from the cage base end side.

Further, although not shown in detail, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to a slider and extends upward in a flat plate shape. A right side rotary drive motor that is attached and a cubic right side rotary ornament 3173 that is attached to the rotary shaft of the right side rotary drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the right side rotary drive motor are provided. The right side rotating decorative body 3173 has different decorative portions 3174 formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 118). Further, the right side rotary decoration 3173 is rotatable by a right side rotary drive motor about an axis extending to the left and right.

Further, although not shown in detail, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached below the right side rotating decorative body 3173 on the upper surface of the slider, and light can be emitted toward the right side rotating decorative body 3173. A lower right side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is provided. The right side rotating decorative body 3173 can be made to emit light by appropriately emitting light from the LED of the lower right side upper surface decorative substrate.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece portion of the right unit base and extends to the upper side in a flat plate shape, and a sub attachment base. A right subside rotation drive motor mounted with the rotation axis facing left and right, and a cubic right subside rotation that is mounted on the rotation shaft of the right subside rotation drive motor and covers the outer circumference of the right subside rotation drive motor. And a decorative body 3175. The right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175 has different decoration portions 3176 formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 118). Further, the right subside rotary decoration body 3175 can be rotated around an axis extending to the left and right by a right subside rotation drive motor.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached below the right sub side rotation decoration body 3175 on the upper surface of the upper piece part of the right unit base, and faces the right sub side rotation decoration body 3175. And a lower right sub-side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted. The right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175 can be made to emit light by appropriately causing the LEDs of the lower right sub-side upper surface decoration substrate to emit light.

The lower right side effect unit 3170 is a state in which the right sub side rotation decoration body 3175 attached to the right unit base is in a state in which the right side rotation decoration body 3173 can enter the lower side in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. The lower center lifting base 3121 of the central effect unit 3120 is arranged at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotary decorations 3126 when the position (raising) is made to the rising end. Further, the lower right side effect unit 3170, when the right sub-side rotary decoration body 3175 is assembled to the game board 5, between the rightmost rotary decoration body 3126 of the lower central performance unit 3120, the right side rotary decoration body 3173. There is a space between the two to allow entry.

The lower right side effect unit 3170 rotates the male screw member by the lower right side lift drive motor, so that the right side rotating decorative body 3173 together with the slider via the lower right side lift base 3171 and the lower central effect unit 3120. The lower center elevating base 3121 can be moved up and down between a descending position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decorative body 3126 in the descending position and an ascending position having the same height as the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. Further, the lower right side effect unit 3170 rotates the cam member by the lower right slide drive motor to move the right side rotating decorative body 3173 via the slider to the appearance position adjacent to and adjacent to the lower central effect unit 3120. , Can be slid in the left-right direction between the retracted position in which about half is located below the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 away from the lower central effect unit 3120.

As shown in FIG. 118, the lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a decorative portion 3127 of each of the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, a decoration portion 3154 of the left side rotation decoration body 3153, a decoration portion 3156 of the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, and a right portion. Different decorations are formed on the decorative portion 3174 of the side rotating decorative body 3173 and the decorative portion 3176 of the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. The four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decorations 3153, the left subside rotating decorations 3155, the right side rotating decorations 3173, and the right subside rotating decorations 3175 are each formed in a dice-shaped cube and extend to the left and right. Different decorations are formed on the first to fourth surfaces around the rotation axis.

In the state where the first surface of each of the four rotation decorations 3126, the left side rotation decoration 3153, the left subside rotation decoration 3155, the right side rotation decoration 3173, and the right subside rotation decoration 3175 is directed to the front, from the left. It has become "Land", "One Eye", "One Eye", "Two Eyes", "Three Eyes", "Four Eyes", "One Eye", and "One Eye". Further, in a state where the second surface of each is faced to the front, "star", "super", "chi", "cha", "n", "su", "!" and "star" are displayed from the left. Also, in the state where the third surface is facing the front, "!", "Shin", "Ge", "Ki", "A", "Ts", "Shin", "!" are displayed from the left. Furthermore, in the state where the fourth surface is facing the front, "celebration", "!", "O", "me", "de", "to", "u", and "!!" are displayed from the left.

In this way, the four rotary ornaments 3126, the left side rotary ornament 3153, the left subside rotary ornament 3155, the right side rotary ornament 3173, and the right subside rotary ornament 3175 are respectively turned to the front with the same numbers. Thus, a predetermined message can be shown to the player, and an expected value of "big hit" can be displayed depending on the content of the message.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 119, the lower movable effect unit 3100 causes the lower front central decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right side decorative body 3172 to appropriately emit light, "Arrows" having different sizes can be displayed by light emission. Specifically, if only the lower front central ornamental body 3111 is made to emit light, a triangular “small arrow” in which the apex of the isosceles triangle faces downward can be made to emit and display (FIG. 114 and FIG. 119(a)). reference). Further, when the lower front central ornamental body 3111 and the raised lower rear central ornamental body 3122 are made to emit light, a downward-pointing "middle arrow" having a rod that extends upward more than the "small arrow" is made to emit light. (See FIG. 115 and FIG. 119(b)). Further, in the state of the “middle arrow”, the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 are raised, and the lower front central decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, the lower right side. When all of the side decorations 3172 are made to emit light, the "large arrow" in which the upper end of the downward arrow that is larger than the "middle arrow" spreads to the left and right can be displayed as light emission (FIGS. 116 and 119(c)). See).

In this way, it is possible to display three small arrows of different sizes, “small arrow”, “middle arrow”, and “large arrow”. It is possible to cause a light emission display that the expected value of “” is high.

Next, an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state, the lower movable effect unit 3100 has a lower central effect unit 3120 in which a lower central elevating base 3121 is located behind a lower front central decorative unit 3110 in a lower position, which is invisible from the front, in a normal state. The four rotating decorations 3126 attached to the upper ends of the lower central lifting bases 3121 are positioned so as to contact the upper ends of the lower front central decorations 3111 in a front view.

Further, in a normal state, in the lower left side effect unit 3150, the lower left side elevating base 3151 is located slightly above the upper end of the lower front central decoration unit 3110 and in a descending position almost invisible from the front, The left side rotary ornament 3153 is separated from the lower central effect unit 3120 to the left via the slider, and about half is located at the retracted position below the left subside rotary ornament 3155, and the left subside rotary ornament 3155 is a game. It is located near the left end of the region 5a, which is lower than the center in the vertical direction.

Further, in the normal state, in the lower right side effect unit 3170, the lower right side lifting base 3171 is located slightly above the upper end of the lower front central decoration unit 3110, and in a lowered position that is almost invisible from the front, The right side rotary ornament 3173 is separated from the lower central effect unit 3120 to the right through the slider, and about half is located at the retracted position below the right subside rotary ornament 3175, and the right subside rotary ornament 3175 is a game. It is located near the right end of the region 5a, which is lower than the center in the vertical direction.

In this normal state, as one of the effects to be presented to the player, for example, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. According to the result of the lottery, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of each rotating decorative body 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portion 3127 facing forward in each rotationally stopped rotating decorative body 3126. To make the player visually recognize. Accordingly, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the rotation of the four rotary decorations 3126 is stopped in a desired combination, and the movable effect by the four rotary decorations 3126 can be enjoyed. Then, when the combination of the respective decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating ornamental bodies 3126 that have stopped rotating satisfies a predetermined condition, the lower rear central ornamental body 3122 attached to the lower central elevating base 3121 by the lower central ornamental board. To cause the lower front central decorative body 3111 of the lower front central decorative unit 3110 located at the front to emit light. As a result, as shown in FIG. 114, a downward arrow is emitted by the lower front center decorative body 3111, so that the downward arrow emits light to display the player's line of sight below the game area 5a. Can be guided to the effect operation unit 301 arranged in the, and the player can be prompted to operate the effect operation unit 301, and it is easy to participate in the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. Therefore, it is possible to make the player entertain the player participation type production and suppress the deterioration of interest.

Alternatively, from the normal state, the lower central elevating base 3121 is set in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. Elevate from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the four rotating decorations 3126 move to the center of the front view game area 5a so as to block a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, and thus the game. Not only can the player be surprised, but the player can be made to think that something is good, and the expectation for the game can be increased. After that, after rotating the four rotating ornaments 3126, the rotation of each rotating ornament 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the ornament portions 3127 facing forward in each of the rotation ornaments 3126 which has stopped rotating is given to the player. Make it visible. As a result, when the four rotary decorations 3126 stop rotating in a desired combination, the player may think that this must be a "big hit" (a lottery result in which an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous) occurs. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation for the lottery result by making the player feel pounding depending on whether or not the rotation of the four rotary decorations 3126 is stopped in a desired combination. Then, when the combination of the respective decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 that have stopped rotating satisfies a predetermined condition, a plurality of lower central decorative boards attached to the lower central lifting base 3121 that is rising are attached. The LED is caused to emit light, and the lower rear central decorative body 3122 arranged in the front and the lower front central decorative body 3111 arranged in the lower front are illuminated and decorated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 115, the lower rear central decoration body 3122 and the lower front central decoration body 3111 cause the downward big arrow to be displayed in a luminescent manner. The player's line of sight can be guided to the effect operation unit 301 arranged below the game area 5a to prompt the player to operate the effect operation unit 301, and the effect operation unit 301 can be displayed by the large arrow light emission display. It is possible to make the player think that it will be a "big hit" by operating it, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type effect by causing the player to operate the effect operation unit 301.

Furthermore, from the normal state, the lower central lifting base 3121 is selected according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. Is raised from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the four rotating decorations 3126 move to the center of the front view game area 5a so as to block a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, and thus the game. Not only can the player be surprised, but the player can be made to think that something is good, and the expectation for the game can be increased. Then, the left and right left side rotating decorations 3153 and the right side rotating decorations 3173 are slid to the appearance positions on the center side, respectively, and the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 are respectively moved. Raise to the raised position (see Figure 116). As a result, the left sub-side rotary ornament 3155, the left side rotary ornament 3153, the four rotary ornaments 3126, the right side rotary ornament 3173, and the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 are aligned in the left-right direction. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the expectation for the game can be raised by making the player think that the lottery result is a "big hit". After that, after rotating the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, the left side rotation decoration body 3153, the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the right side rotation decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175, the rotation is stopped and left. Ornamental portion 3156 of sub-side rotation ornamental body 3155, ornamental portion 3154 of left side rotational ornamental body 3153, each ornamental portion 3127 of four rotational ornamental bodies 3126, ornamental portion 3174 of right-side rotational ornamental body 3173, and right sub-side rotational ornamental portion The player visually recognizes the combination of the decorative portion 3176 of the body 3175. At this time, since the plurality of decorative portions 3127 includes the decorative portion 3127 having the numeral decoration, the countdown can be performed by stopping the rotation so that the numeral decoration portion 3127 faces forward. It is possible to make the player think that the lottery result must be a "big hit" by the countdown effect, and enhance the interest in the game. Then, when the left sub-side rotation decoration 3155, the left side rotation decoration 3153, the four rotation decorations 3126, the right side rotation decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotation decoration 3175 stop rotating and the countdown ends, The lower front central ornamental body 3111, the lower rear central ornamental body 3122, the lower left side ornamental body 3152, and the lower right side ornamental body 3172 are light-emitted. As a result, as shown in FIG. 116, a larger downward arrow (giant arrow) is luminescently displayed, so that the player can operate the effect operation unit 301 arranged at the tip of the huge arrow. Thus, it is possible to convince that the lottery result is a "big hit", and the player can surely operate the effect operation unit 301. When this huge arrow is lit and displayed, a message explaining the effect operation unit 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 is raised and the effect operation unit 301 is rotated. The operation unit 302 is rotated at high speed (see FIG. 117). As a result, since the rotation operation unit 302 rotates at a high speed, the player's interest can be enhanced, so that the pressing operation unit 303 can be surely pressed, and the player's enjoyment is reduced. Can be suppressed.

As an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, in FIG. 117, the effect display device 1600 displays the characters "The rotation of the lower button is hot!" The faster the rotation speed of the section 302, the higher the expected value of the "big hit", so that the player is notified. That is, the expected value is represented by the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302, and an effect image that informs the expected value to the player is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in FIG. 117, as the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIG. 119, the lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a lower front central decoration body 3111, a lower rear central decoration body 3122, and a lower left side decoration. An effect image suggesting an operation method of the effect operation unit 301 in which the player's operation is prompted by the “arrow” that is light-emitted and displayed by the body 3152, the lower right side decorative element 3172, or the like may be displayed. Specifically, the effect images such as "press the button!", "turn the dial!", "turn the dial left!", "turn the dial right!", etc. are displayed. Thereby, the operation of the effect operation unit 301 can be performed accurately, and the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 301 can be surely enjoyed.

Then, the player may operate the effect operation unit 301 to display a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, and an expected value that is a “big hit” may be displayed by the effect image. An expected value is obtained by using four rotation decorations 3126, left side rotation decorations 3153, left subside rotation decorations 3155, right side rotation decorations 3173, and right subside rotation decorations 3175 each formed in a dice shape. It may be displayed.

As an expected value display using the four rotating ornaments 3126, the left side rotating ornament 3153, the left subside rotating ornament 3155, the right side rotating ornament 3173, and the right subside rotating ornament 3175, which are respectively formed in a dice shape. Performs an effect of displaying an expected value that is a "big hit", by combining the decorative portions 3127, the decorative portions 3154, the decorative portions 3156, the decorative portions 3174, and the decorative portions 3176 that face the front by rotating and stopping each. .. Specifically, when using only the four rotary decorations 3126 of the lower central effect unit 3120 in the center, there are, for example, the following three patterns. In the pattern a1, the expected value is displayed in a state where the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing the front when the four rotary decorations 3126 have stopped rotating is a combination in which the meaning cannot be read by the player. No pattern. In the pattern a2, the rotating decorative bodies 3126 stop rotating with the second surface facing forward, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 is “H”, “H”, “N”, and “S”, and the expected value is high to some extent. The pattern displaying that. The pattern a3 has an extremely high expected value in a state in which the respective rotation decorations 3126 stop rotating with the third surface facing the front and the combination of the decoration portions 3127 is “ge” “ki” “a” “tsu”. The pattern displaying that. In this way, the expected value can be displayed by the pattern displayed by stopping the rotation of the four rotary decorations 3126, and the expected value becomes higher in the order of pattern a1, pattern a2, and pattern a3.

Further, as effects using the lower movable effect unit 3100, all of the four rotation decorations 3126, the left side rotation decorations 3153, the left subside rotation decorations 3155, the right side rotation decorations 3173, and the right subside rotation decorations 3175 ( Using eight (8) dice-shaped rotating bodies, the effect of displaying an expected value that is a “big hit” is displayed by a combination of the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, the decorative portion 3156, the decorative portion 3174, and the decorative portion 3176. You may do it. Specifically, there are the following six patterns. In the pattern b1, the combination of the decoration portion 3127, the decoration portion 3154, the decoration portion 3156, the decoration portion 3174, and the decoration portion 3176 whose rotation has stopped is different (no expected value is displayed). In the pattern b2, the left sub-side rotating decoration body 3155 is “Shin” or “star”, the left side rotating decoration body 3153 is “!” or “Shin”, and the four central rotating decoration bodies 3126 are “H”, “C”, and “C”. “S”, the right side rotary ornament 3173 is “!” or “Shin”, and the right sub side rotary ornament 3175 is “Shin” or “star” (chance display). In the pattern b3, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 is “Shin” or “star”, the left side rotation decoration body 3153 is “!” or “Shin”, and the four center rotation decoration bodies 3126 are “G”, “Ki”, and “K”. The combination of "A" and "T", the right side rotary ornament 3173 is "!" or "Shin", and the right sub side rotary ornament 3175 is "Shin" or "star" (Gekiatsu display). In the pattern b4, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is “Shin” or “star”, the left side rotating decoration 3153 is “super”, and the four central rotating decorations 3126 are “HI”, “YA”, “N”, and “SU”. , The right side rotary ornament 3173 is “!”, and the right sub side rotary ornament 3175 is “combination” or “star” (super chance display). In the pattern b5, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is “sou” or “star”, the left side rotating decoration 3153 is “super”, and the four center rotating decorations 3126 are “ge”, “ki”, “a”, and “tsu”. , The right side rotating ornament 3173 is “!”, and the right sub-side rotating ornament 3175 is a combination of “凰” or “star” (super gekiatsu display). In the pattern b6, the left sub-side rotating ornament 3155 is “celebration”, the left side rotating ornament 3153 is “!”, and the four central rotating ornaments 3126 are “O”, “Me”, “De” “To”, and the right side. The combination of the rotating ornament 3173 is “U” and the right sub-side rotating ornament 3175 is “!!” (“big hit” is confirmed). In this way, the rotation is stopped by the eight rotating bodies 3126, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the left subside rotating decoration 3155, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right subside rotating decoration 3175. The expected value can be displayed by the pattern, and the expected value increases in the order of pattern b1, pattern b2, pattern b3, pattern b4, pattern b5, and pattern b6.

In the above-mentioned production, if the player does not operate the production operation unit 301 within a certain time after the operation of the production operation unit 301 is prompted, the production for displaying the expected value as described above is not performed. , "Arrow" light emission display is also turned off. On the other hand, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is prompted, an effect such as the above expected value is displayed using the remaining effect time. When the production time is over, the above production is finished and the light emission display of the "arrow" is turned off and the production is finished.

Thus, according to the lower movable effect unit 3100, when the game state changes due to the game being played in the game area 5a in the normal state (the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004). Depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of B), the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged side by side on the upper side of the lower front central decorative body 3111 rotate, or the lower central The four rotating ornaments 3126 arranged side by side by the elevating base 3121 rise together with the lower rear central ornamental body 3122, the four rotating ornaments 3126 elevated by the lower central elevating base 3121 rotate, and the lower left portion A pair of left side rotating decorative body 3153 and right side rotating decorative body 3173 slide left and right by a lower left slide drive motor of the side effect unit 3150 and a lower right slide drive motor of the lower right side effect unit 3170 (slide mechanism). Or the left side rotating ornament 3153 and the right side rotating ornament 3173 rotate, and the left side rotating ornament 3153 and the right side rotating ornament by the slide mechanism and the lower left side elevating base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171. 3173 are arranged in the left-right direction with the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175, or the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 rotate. Since it is possible to show the player such a movable effect, the central movable unit 3125 (four rotation decorations 3126), the left side rotation decoration 3153, the right side rotation decoration 3173, and the left subside rotation are displayed. It is possible to draw attention to the decorative body 3155, the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175, and the like, and to enjoy the movable effect by them.

Further, when the lower central elevating base 3121 is located at the lower end, the lower rear central ornamental body 3122 is caused to emit light and the lower front central ornamental body 3111 is caused to emit light to display a downward arrow, or the lower central elevating center is elevated. By raising the base 3121 and causing the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111 to emit light by the plurality of LEDs on the lower central decoration substrate, a large downward arrow is displayed to emit light, and a pair of lower left side elevations By elevating the base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 to cause the lower left side decoration 3152 and the lower right side decoration 3172 to emit light, a larger downward arrow can be emitted and displayed. It is possible to entertain the player also by the production, and it is possible to guide the player's line of sight to the production operation unit 301 below by the downward arrow that is displayed in a light emitting manner, and to operate the production operation unit 301 for the player. Can be encouraged. Then, in the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the player operates the rotation operation unit 302, or the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, thereby participating in the player participation type effect. And can entertain.

Therefore, since various movable effects, light emission effects, and player participation type effects as described above can be performed, it is possible to present various patterns of effects to the player by appropriately combining them. Since it is possible to make the player less tired and less likely to predict the effect pattern for the player, it is possible to surprise the player by performing an unexpected effect. It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, as described above, the lower front central ornamental body 3111, the lower rear central ornamental body 3122, the lower left side ornamental body 3152, the lower right side ornamental body 3172, etc. are caused to emit light to display downward arrows, and the player is directed downward. When the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is urged, an effect image that prompts the operation of the effect operation unit 301 on the effect display device 1600, an effect image that explains the operation of the effect operation unit 301, and an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous By displaying an effect image or the like showing the relationship between the occurrence of and the effect operation unit 301, it is possible to strongly encourage the player to participate in the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. It is possible to easily operate the effect operation unit 301, entertain the player participation type effect, and suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-9b. Rear upper movable production unit]
The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 120 to 122 and the like. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the upper part in the back box 3010 above the effect display device 1600. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 includes an upper rear left unit 3210 attached to the upper left corner in the back box 3010 and an upper rear right unit 3230 attached to the upper right corner in the back box 3010.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper rear left unit 3210 of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is slidable in a diagonal direction from the upper left to the lower right on the left base 3211 mounted in the back box 3010 and the left base 3211. The left slider 3212 attached, the linear rack gear 3213 attached to the left slider 3212, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 attached to the left base 3211 with the rotation axis facing forward and backward, and the upper rear A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the left drive motor 3214 and having a rotation shaft of the upper rear left drive motor 3214 connected to the input side, and a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3215 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250. , A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3216 meshing with the drive gear 3215 and rotatably mounted on the left base 3211, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3216 meshing with the first transmission gear 3216 and rotatably mounted on the left base 3211. A second transmission gear 3217 having a spur gear shape, a third transmission gear 3218 meshed with the second transmission gear 3217 and rotatably attached to the left base 3211, a third transmission gear 3218 and a rack gear 3213. And a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 3219 rotatably attached to the left base 3211.

The upper rear left unit 3210 is attached to the lower end of the left slider 3212 and extends in the left-right direction. An upper rear left decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear left decoration 3220 can be light-emitting decorated by causing a plurality of LEDs of the upper rear left decoration substrate to emit light.

The upper left rear unit 3210 can drive the upper left drive motor 3214 to move the upper left left decoration 3220 up and down via the rack gear 3213.

Although not shown in detail, the upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the right base 3231 attached to the inside of the back box 3010 and the right base 3231 slidably in an oblique direction from upper right to lower left. A right slider 3232, a linear rack gear 3233 attached to the right slider 3232, an upper rear right drive motor 3234 attached to the right base 3231 with its rotation axis facing forward and backward, and an upper rear right. A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the drive motor 3234 and connected to the input side of the rotary shaft of the upper rear right drive motor 3234, and a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3235 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250. A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3236 meshing with the drive gear 3235 and rotatably attached to the right base 3231; and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3236 meshing with the first transmission gear 3236 and rotatably attached to the right base 3231. A second transmission gear 3237 in the form of a spur gear, a third transmission gear 3238 meshed with the second transmission gear 3237 and rotatably attached to the right base 3231, a third transmission gear 3238 and a rack gear 3233, respectively. And a pinion gear 3239 in the form of a spur gear that is meshed with and is rotatably attached to the right base 3231.

In addition, the upper rear right unit 3230 is attached to the lower end of the right slider 3232 and extends in the left-right direction. And an upper rear right decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be light-emitting decorated by causing a plurality of LEDs of the upper rear right decorative substrate to emit light.

The upper rear right unit 3230 can drive the upper rear right drive motor 3234 to move the upper rear right decorative body 3240 up and down via the rack gear 3233.

The clutch mechanism 3250 has a cylindrical housing case 3251 and a plurality of protrusions 3252a radially extending to the vicinity of the inner surface of the housing case 3251 in the housing case 3251. An input member 3252 to which the rotary shaft of the rear right drive motor 3234 is attached, and a plurality of transmission grooves 3253a inserted in the housing case 3251 with a projection 3252a of the input member 3252 having a circumferential gap. A plurality of cam surfaces 3253b formed so as to be closer to the inner surface of the housing case 3251 as it gets closer to the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the driving gear 3215 or the driving gear 3235 protruding from the housing case 3251. The output member 3253 having an output shaft 3253c attached thereto, the plurality of rollers 3254 inserted between the plurality of cam surfaces 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251, and the housing case 3251. A main body housing 3256 that has a tightening spring 3255 that is tightened from the outside, a housing case 3251 and a housing recess 3256a that houses the tightening spring 3255, and is attached to the left base 3211 or the right base 3231. A cover member 3257 that closes the housing recess 3256a of 3256 and penetrates the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253, and a bearing 3258 attached to the cover member 3257 and through which the output shaft 3253c is inserted are provided. (See FIGS. 122(a) to 122(c)).

When the upper left rear drive motor 3214 or the upper right right drive motor 3234 rotates the input member 3252, the clutch mechanism 3250 causes the plurality of protrusions 3252a of the input member 3252 to move to the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253. The output member 3253 is brought into contact with the output member 3253, and the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 attached to the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253 is rotated. That is, the clutch mechanism 3250 can directly transmit the rotation from the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 to the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side.

Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, when the output member 3253 is rotated from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side via the output shaft 3253c, the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 moves toward the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252. Therefore, the space between the cam surface 3253b and the inner surface of the housing case 3251 becomes narrow, and the roller 3254 is caught between them. As a result, the rotation of the output member 3253 is blocked, the rotation of the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 is locked, and the rotation from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side is transmitted through the input member 3252 to the upper rear. It is not transmitted to the left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Therefore, even if a force to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 downward due to gravity acts, the clutch mechanism 3250 causes the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 of the drive gear 3215 via the output member 3253. Since the rotation is locked, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 do not move downward arbitrarily, and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is loaded. Instead, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be kept stopped at arbitrary positions.

In the clutch mechanism 3250 of the present embodiment, the housing case 3251 is tightened from the outer peripheral side by the tightening spring 3255 made of a coil spring, and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. Therefore, when the rotational load (torque) applied to the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side via the output shaft 3253c becomes larger than a predetermined value, the tightening force (biasing force) of the tightening spring 3255 is increased. ), the housing case 3251 rotates, the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 abuts on the protrusion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is rotated from the output side with a strong force, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 that fastens the housing case 3251 and the housing case 3251, and the torque is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side to be released, the roller 3254 cannot be unlocked by being strongly bitten, or the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251 are damaged. Can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 122(d), the clutch mechanism 3250 inserts the two rollers 3254 between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254. The lock springs 3260 may be biased toward the protrusions 3252a close to the lock springs 3260. Accordingly, when a force to rotate the output member 3253 acts from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately moved to the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251. It can be engaged with the inner surface, and the rotation (rotation angle) of the output member 3253 from when the rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side acts until the lock is applied. It can be reduced as much as possible.

Next, an effect using the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In a normal state, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is located above the effect display device 1600 and behind the upper front movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 is invisible to the player. In this normal state, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are in a non-driving state respectively, but as described above, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are The rotation of the drive gear 3215 and the drive gear 3235 is locked via the output member 3253 by the clutch mechanism 3250 interposed between the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240. The rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 do not move downward without permission.

Accordingly, in order to prevent the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 from moving downward, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 continue to be driven or move downward. It is not necessary to provide an electric lock mechanism for preventing the above, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. In addition, since the existence of the clutch mechanism 3250 can prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from arbitrarily moving, the game board 5 is being transported or attached to the island facility in the game hall. Even if vibrations or accelerations are applied at the time of etc., the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 remain in the state of the origin at the time of shipment, and it is not necessary to perform unnecessary origin adjustment. It is possible to reduce the labor required for installing the game board 5, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

In this normal state, in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that has been drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 move diagonally downward toward the center via the clutch mechanism 3250, respectively, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 is moved. And the left end of the upper rear right decoration 3240 come into contact with each other to form one large decoration (see FIG. 120). As a result, a large decorative body that extends to the left and right appears on the upper part of the front surface of the effect display device 1600, which can surprise the player and entertain the player to suppress a decrease in interest.

As described above, according to the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, the upper rear left drive motor 3214, the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212, and the right slider 3232 (the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right). Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between each of them and the decorative body 3240), vibrations from the effect operation unit 301 and other movable decorative bodies which can be operated by the player, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, and the upper portion. Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate due to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 moving downward due to gravity or the like acting on the rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, The roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the member 3253, and the roller 3254 is caught between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b. Transmission of rotation from the left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side is blocked, and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from freely descending, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are unexpectedly passed through the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232. It is possible to prevent the movement (falling) and to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from unintentionally causing a player to feel distrust. Therefore, the player can enjoy the movements of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 and suppress the deterioration of interest.

In addition, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side try to descend, the clutch mechanism 3250 can restrict the rotation of the output member 3253 and lock the output member 3253. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at a position of any height via the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be varied. It is possible to show the player a variety of effect patterns that stop moving up and down at a position, and it is difficult for the player to get tired of the movable effects of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and a decrease in interest is suppressed. Can be made

Further, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are stopped at arbitrary positions in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left It is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, prevent early damage to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 due to overload, and prevent the upper portion. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to damage to the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 122(d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are respectively locked by the lock springs 3260. In the case of urging the protrusions 3252a side close to each other, when a force for rotating the output member 3253 acts from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 immediately. Can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251, and the lock is performed after the rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side acts. The rotation of the output member 3253 up to this time can be reduced as much as possible. Thus, when the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 move the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 downward, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 descend smoothly without jerking. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the movements of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and entertains the movable effect by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, by moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 respectively downward to bring the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 into contact with each other, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and Since a large decorative body can be formed by combining the upper rear right decorative bodies 3240 with each other, a large decorative body can be merged to have a strong impact on the player, which can be enjoyed by the player. In addition to being able to play, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit game”) in which the player has an advantage will occur due to the appearance of a large ornament, and expectation for the game. It is possible to enhance the feeling and suppress a decrease in interest. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other and united, the upper rear right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 on the other side is moved by contacting each other. However, since each of them has the clutch mechanism 3250, the force to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (try to rotate from the output side). Force), the roller 3254 is caught between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251 to lock the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving due to contact with each other, and the reaction of the contact causes the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is also possible to prevent the 3240 from returning, and it is possible to surely entertain the player with the movable effect in which the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other and suppress a decrease in interest. ..

Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, since the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256, the output member is output from the output side. By rotating 3253, the roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253, and the roller 3254 is caught between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Thus, when a force to rotate the housing case 3251 acts via the plurality of rollers 3254, the force (torque) to rotate the housing case 3251 is the frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255. If it is larger than this, slippage occurs between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the housing case 3251 rotates. Then, as the housing case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates via the plurality of rollers 3254, and the circumferential end portion of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 abuts the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252, The rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is rotated from the output side with a strong force, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 that fastens the housing case 3251 and the housing case 3251, and the torque is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side to be released, the roller 3254 cannot be unlocked by being strongly bitten, or the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251 are damaged. It is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably prevent the above-mentioned effects.

[5-9c. Front movable production unit]
The upper front movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the front side of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the upper part inside the back box 3010 above the effect display device 1600 in a front view. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is a horizontally long unit base 3301 attached to the upper portion in the back box 3010, an upper front drive motor 3302 attached to the unit base 3301, and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be vertically movable. And an upper front movable decorative body 3350 that moves up and down by the drive of the upper front drive motor 3302.

The upper front movable decorative body 3350 is a circular central decorative body 3351 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be able to move up and down (downward) in the horizontal direction center, and arranged on both left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351. A pair of first projecting decorative parts 3352a and a pair of first projecting decorative parts 3352a are connected to each other and are attached to the rear side of the central decorative body 3351 rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A first projecting ornament 3352 having a connecting rod 3352b, a pair of second projecting ornaments 3353a arranged on the left and right sides of the central ornament 3351, and a pair of second projecting ornaments 3353a are connected to each other. And has a second connecting rod 3353b which is coaxially attached to the first connecting rod 3352b of the first protruding decorative body 3352 and is rotatably attached to the rear side of the central decorative body 3351 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The second protruding decorative body 3353 is provided.

The first projecting decorative body 3352 has a pair of first projecting decorative portions 3352a formed in a long projecting isosceles triangle shape having the central decorative body 3351 side as a base. In the pair of first projecting decorative portions 3352a, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the right side of the central decorative body 3351 is arranged rearward in the front-rear direction than the first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the left side. The first projecting decoration 3352 has a link mounting portion 3352c at the tip of the first projecting decoration 3352a on the right side, to which the tip of a second link rod 3304 on the right side described later is rotatably mounted.

The second projecting decorative body 3353 has a pair of second projecting decorative portions 3353a formed in an isosceles triangular shape with a long base protruding toward the central decorative body 3351. In the pair of second projecting decorative portions 3353a, the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the left side of the central decorative body 3351 is arranged rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the right side. The second projecting decoration 3353 has a link mounting portion 3353c at the tip of the left second projecting decoration 3353a to which the tip of a second link rod 3304 on the left to be described later is rotatably mounted.

In the upper front movable decoration body 3350, the first protruding decoration portion 3352a of the first protruding decoration body 3352 and the second protruding decoration portion 3353a of the second protruding decoration body 3353 are formed in the same shape and the same size. There is. The upper front movable decorative body 3350 has a left side second protruding decorative portion 3353a behind the left side first protruding decorative portion 3352a and a right side first protruding decorative portion 3352a behind the right side second protruding decorative portion 3353a. The first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are positioned so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

Although not shown, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 has a plurality of LEDs on the front side of the central decorative body 3351, the pair of first projecting decorative portions 3352a, and the pair of second projecting decorative portions 3353a. A central decorative body 3351, a pair of first projecting decorative parts 3352a, and a pair of first projecting decorative parts 3352a. The second projecting decoration portions 3353a can be independently illuminated and decorated.

Further, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis whose base end extends in the front-rear direction at a symmetrical position with respect to the center of the front surface in the left-right direction. A pair of first link rods 3303 extending in the shape of a rod and a pair of first link rods 3303 are attached to the tips of the respective first link rods 3303 so that their base ends are rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and the tip ends are the first protrusions. A pair of second link rods 3304 rotatably attached to the link mounting portion 3352c of the decorative body 3352 and the link mounting portion 3353c of the second projecting decorative body 3353 so as to be rotatable around axes extending in the front-rear direction, and the front surface of the unit base 3301. An upper stopper 3305 protruding forward from the first link rod 3303 for restricting upward rotation of the tip end side of the first link rod 3303, and a lower stopper 3306 restricting downward rotation of the first link rod 3303 for tip end side downward. ing.

Next, an effect using the upper front movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state of the upper front movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 107 and the like, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is elevated, and the central decorative body 3351 is located near the upper end in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. At the same time, the first projecting decoration 3352 and the second projecting decoration 3353 extend horizontally and overlap each other in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 124(a)). In this normal state, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are overlapped with each other in the front-rear direction, so that the player can recognize it as one decorative body. In a normal state, the pair of first link rods 3303 are in contact with the upper stoppers 3305, respectively, and further rotation in the direction in which the tip end side moves upward is prevented.

In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004. Then, the central ornamental body 3351 moves together with the first protruding ornamental body 3352 and the second protruding ornamental body 3353, and the entire upper front movable ornamental body 3350 moves downward. At this time, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 move downward while being horizontally extended. By moving the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 downward, the second link rod 3304 on the right side attached to the link mounting portion 3352c of the first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the right side and the left side The left side second link rods 3304 attached to the link attaching portions 3353c of the second projecting decorative portions 3353a are moved downward, respectively, and a pair of second link rods 3304 attached to the tips thereof, respectively. The first link rods 3303 rotate so that their tip ends move downward.

Then, when the pair of first link rods 3303 that rotate with the downward movement of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 (the central decorative body 3351) contact the lower stoppers 3306, further rotation is prevented. This is the state (see FIG. 124(b)). After the pair of first link rods 3303 contact the lower stoppers 3306, respectively, and when the central decoration body 3351 further moves downward, the right side first protruding decoration portion 3352a and the left side second protruding decoration portion 3353a, Since the downward movement is restricted by the left and right second link rods 3304, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are located at the center of the first connecting rod 3352b and the second connecting rod 3353b ( The first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the side opposite to the side to which the second link rod 3304 is attached respectively rotate around the center) of the central decorative body 3351 in the direction of moving downward. This is the case (see FIG. 124(c)). As a result, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a, which are arranged on both the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, rotate around the central decorative body 3351 so that the scissors open, respectively. The entire upper front movable decoration body 3350 can be enlarged, and a player can be surprised and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

As described above, according to the upper front movable effect unit 3300, in a normal state, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 are overlapped in the front-rear direction to form one decorative body. When the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is lowered, the overlapping first projecting decorative portion 3352a and second projecting decorative portion 3353a are rotated and opened so that their tips are separated from each other. It is possible to surprise the player who has recognized it as one ornament, and to entertain the movement of the upper front movable ornament 3350.

Further, by the action of the first link rod 3303 and the second link rod 3304, only by moving the upper front movable decorative body 3350 downward, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are moved to the central decorative body 3351. Since it can be opened by rotating in a direction opposite to each other around the center, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive motor for rotating the first projecting decoration 3352 and the second projecting decoration 3353.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (progress of a game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game balls B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game balls B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but is a main control which is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. MPU, main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM incorporated in the main control MPU are provided. The main control MPU has, in addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start opening sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004. The mouth sensor 2511, the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2301 for detecting the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, and the first big winning opening 2005 The first big winning opening sensor 2512 for detecting the game ball B, the second big winning opening sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006, and the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are detected. Detection signals from the magnetic sensor 3003 and the like are input via the main control I/O port.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the starting opening solenoid 2514, the first attacker solenoid 2515, and the second attacker solenoid 2515. A drive signal is output to 2516, or a status indicator of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I/O port, a normal symbol indicator, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special reserve number indicator, The drive signal is output to the second special symbol display device, the second special reserved number display device, the round display device, or the like.

In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2511, the gate sensor 2301, the first big winning opening sensor 2512, and the second big winning opening sensor 2513 are non-contact type electromagnetic waves. In contrast to the type of proximity switch used, a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2511. , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2301 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2511, and the gate sensor 2301.

Further, when an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (“big hit” game, etc.) occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is opened, and the game ball B is frequently entered. The detection of the game ball B by the first special winning opening sensor 2512 and the second special winning opening sensor 2513 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are also used for the first special winning opening sensor 2512 and the second special winning opening sensor 2513. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

In addition, the main control MPU sends various kinds of information regarding games (game information) and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU sends various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. When the main control MPU receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511, although a detailed description thereof will be given later.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Discharge control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game balls B, performs the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and the firing control by the firing solenoid 542, and the ball feed control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. The control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 552, a tank rail during maintenance. 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the game ball B in the payout device 580 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper plate 201), and a ball removal switch for starting the ball removal operation is provided.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
Although not shown in detail, the payout control unit 633a that performs various kinds of control related to payouts on the payout control board 633 is a micro in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has built-in functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various types of information (game information) from the main control board 1310 and various kinds of payout commands in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the device being input through the payout control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 and the payout. Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch that detects opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , The command for outputting to the error LED indicator via the payout control I/O port or transmitting the command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 through the payout control I/O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator and displays alphanumeric characters and figures to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that "the ball is out" (specifically, the ball is cut off). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball ball" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate. When the number "3" is displayed, the fact that the "counting switch error" has occurred (specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is defective based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591) is notified. , When the number “5” is displayed, the fact that it is a “retry error” (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit) is notified, and the number “6” is displayed. When it is displayed, it means that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number “7” is displayed, the fact that “CR is not connected” (the electric connection is cut off at any position from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit) is notified, When the number "9" is displayed, it is informing that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game ball B to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 by a serial method, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port to the payout control MPU. Is entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, which signal is the ball lending. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display unit of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Firing controller]
The firing control unit 633b performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches regarding firing are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal to this clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing And a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , And generates a ball feeding reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the relationship of the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger touches the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's intention is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball B is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

Based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 182, and a launch reference pulse. It is output to the firing solenoid 542 in response to the input. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200. One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped and the received game ball B is delivered to the ball launching device 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. Controlled.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various kinds of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off processing even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 125, the peripheral control board 1510 uses a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and the effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control of.

[6-3a. Peripheral controller]
Although not shown in detail, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. built-in. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. Sending the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like from the lamp drive board serial I/O port to each decorative board of the game board 5 , Game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to drive motors for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port to the drive motor of the game board 5 or Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive solenoid and outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lift drive motor 367, and the like, and each decorative board of the door frame 3. The door side drive emission data, which is composed of a door side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED provided in the frame, is used as a frame decoration drive board serial I/O port. To the door frame 3 side, or control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the display control unit serial I/O port to the effect display control unit 1512. , And outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting positions in the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are peripheral control MPUs. Has been entered in. The detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 operates based on this operation signal. Watching for activity.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 462 provided in the door frame 3, the body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects tailored to various effects are played from the speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information. Signal, 2.1 ch surround signal, or 4.1 ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). The peripheral control MPU is a built-in WDT and an external device. Using WDT together, it diagnoses whether its own system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input/output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting blink command, the game board side lighting blink command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the production drive board of the game board 5 are serial input different from the display command. The output port is used, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The production drive board outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting/blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or based on the received game board side lighting/blinking command. The lighting signal or blinking signal is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

In addition, the production drive board sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button lift drive motor 367 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, and the like. Or output to.

[6-3b. Performance display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls the effect display device 1600 for display. (Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied. I have it.

This display control MPU has a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives the execution signal from the VDP, and performs the interrupt process when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and its control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM, in time series. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data to the VDP, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs a running signal to that effect to the display control MPU. A line buffer system is adopted for VDP. The “line buffer method” means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is changed to the effect display device 1600. It is a method of outputting to.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM is large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 is large, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the image RAM having a high access speed and copied, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before expanding the sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the vertical position (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superimposing order”) when the positions arranged on the screen and the sprites overlap each other.

It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, one sprite character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged horizontally 2 x vertically 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel and the main scanning in the direction intersecting with the one direction sequentially from the left to the right when viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially performs one line operation from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. To each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and when drawing data for the next line is similarly input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, pixels are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game content by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 so that the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, it is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role object 2500 depending on the driving strength. In addition, the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be continuously shot in one minute. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B contacts the obstacle nail N. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill (not shown) that rotates by abutting the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view from the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N, The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role object 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2502 to the stage 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2503, the part is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that it is received in the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When the game balls B are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first starting opening 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the side unit 2200 and the obstacle nail N bring the game ball B to the center side in the left-right direction, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Alternatively, there is a possibility of being accepted in the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, or the like. When the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B struck in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right hit). , Is discharged to the upper part of the gate unit 2300 through the right side of the center accessory 2500. In addition to the gate portion 2003 of the gate unit 2300, this portion is provided with the second starting opening 2004 and the general winning opening 2001 of the center accessory 2500, and passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

Then, when the game ball B hit to the right passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the result of the drawn ordinary lottery is "normal win", the second start opening which is closed. 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are delivered from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Be paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0. 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as a normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of this ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the elapse of the variable time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the ordinary lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result cannot be started. The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is held until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is finished. Further, the maximum number of ordinary lottery results to be held is limited to four, and if the number is more than four, even if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, the number is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 (for example, “big hit”, A lottery of special lottery results that generate "middle hit", "small hit", "probability change (probable change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit" is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time) Note that the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and is selected by lottery. The special lottery results include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time saving (time saving) hit", " "Probability variation short time hit", "Probability variation short time no hit", etc.

The special lottery results (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are the special lottery results that cause the advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special variation time, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 becomes ready to receive the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 while the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are received. A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of the game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201. Therefore, by allowing the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 to receive the game ball B when the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 can receive the game ball B, The game ball B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is a game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The open/close pattern of closing the open state after accepting is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) is reached after the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received. If any one of the following conditions is satisfied, that is, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are received in the first big prize hole 2005 or the second big prize hole 2006, the game ball B cannot be accepted. The opening/closing pattern to be closed (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if "2R jackpot" is 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is 15 rounds, an advantageous gaming state advantageous for the player is generated.

In the case of "big hit", change the probability that special lottery results such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game ("probability change"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. (“Short-time winning”) There is a “hit”.

In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery by the receipt of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the result of the special lottery that has been drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result can be started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Pending The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening are set. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special control result is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. In the suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400, a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and then the special lottery result is suggested by a combination of the LEDs that are lit.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is such that, in a state in which three picture strings each including a plurality of pictures are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, each picture string is changed and the variably displayed picture string is displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective picture strings are stopped and displayed so that the pictures of the three picture strings that are stopped and displayed are a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “miss”, after the three picture columns stop and each picture is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is (Time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result that has been drawn. A player participation type effect in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated can be performed. In the player participation type production, the operation ring drive motor 342 can be used to rotate, vibrate, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation button lift drive motor. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Also, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, and the front movable unit 2600, the lower movable movable unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the upper rear. The movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like can be appropriately used to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, and the like, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's game It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform an operation to be performed, a correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is requested to be pressed, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the table effect unit of the table unit 2000 on the game board 5 according to the special lottery result selected by the lottery. 2600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 and the like can be appropriately used to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, and the like. It is possible to entertain the player with various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The game ball B in this embodiment corresponds to the game medium of the present invention.
[9. Characteristic effect of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the front wall 552b of the ball tank 552 in the main body frame 4 has the overflow portion 552f that is cut out so as to be lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge, and Since the end has the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the overflow surface portion 501m that is inclined so that the front end side becomes higher, the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 by being supplied from the island facility When the amount increases, first, it is possible to flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f having the lowest height of the outer peripheral upper edge, and the game overflowing from the ball tank 552. The ball B can be released to the overflow surface portion 501m, and the game ball B that has flown from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m can be returned to the inside of the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from increasing more than necessary in the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball debris) due to the engagement between the game balls B.

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, so that it is accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m. It is possible to prevent the game ball B in the ball tank 552 from being strongly exerted by the backward pressing force by the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from clogging in the ball tank 552. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

Furthermore, in the detour passage 552g, since the left side in the front view, which is away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, is inclined so as to be low, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 via the overflow surface portion 501m, The detour passage 552g can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553, and the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position along the left side that is away from the ball tank 552. The flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553, and the game ball B is suppressed from being strongly pressed in the tank rail 553 by the game ball. It is possible to prevent B from clogging.

Further, at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is made higher than that of the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m and flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is on the left side on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to make a ball. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Since it is also high, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) with respect to the bypass passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is changed from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear side. The flow can be made to flow in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pressing each other and being bitten by the directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B becoming uneven, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B occurs. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom portion of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that they are lined up in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are lined up, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the region where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, since a wide bulging portion 553b capable of arranging a plurality of game balls B is provided, the game discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably exhibited.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since the game balls B are changed so as to match with each other, the plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a line in the width direction as they go toward the downstream side in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end, so the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) The plurality of gaming balls B that are stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction are circulated to the downstream side through a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, so that the number of stages in the height direction is reduced to form one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, by the tank rail 553, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) while being aligned in a line.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be located far from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it is possible to make it difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. However, there is no possibility that a short-circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring will occur due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. It is possible to make it difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces on the overflow surface section 501m, or to make it difficult to fall from the rear side even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and to a gaming machine (parrot machine) in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused, It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

Further, although the bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552 in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball tank and the bypass passage may be formed separately. ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the bypass passage 552g is inclined so that one side in the left-right direction is lowered, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the bypass passage is not inclined in the left-right direction. Also good.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 500 Main body frame base unit 501 Main body frame base 501a Base main body 501m Overflow surface part 501n Left step 501o Right step 501p Rib 550 Discharge base unit 551 Discharge base 551j Discharge Portion 551k Terminal cover 552 Ball tank 552a Bottom wall 552b Front wall 552c Rear wall 552d Left side wall 552e Right side wall 552f Overflow portion 552g Detour passage 552h Passage surface 552i Weir portion 552j Guide surface portion 552k Opening 552l Flange portion 553 Tank rail 553a Main guide Portion 553b Swelling portion 554 First rail cover 555 Second rail cover 556 Ball rectifying member 558 External terminal plate 558a Electric wire connection terminal

Claims (1)

A storage part, which is provided in the upper part on the back side of the game machine and has a storage area capable of storing the game balls supplied from the island facility,
A tank rail portion capable of guiding the game balls stored in the storage area to the rear side of the game machine from the storage area and guiding the ball to the downstream side,
In a gaming machine equipped with
A partition wall partitioning the upper opening of the storage region,
A non-reservoir region portion formed outside the upper opening partitioned by the partition wall portion;
Prepare,
A specific inclined surface that can guide the game ball toward the tank rail portion side is formed in the non-storage area portion so that the game ball located in the non-storage area portion can flow into the tank rail portion due to a predetermined event. Ri name is,
The specific inclined surface has a surface inclined downward from the front side to the rear side of the game machine over a predetermined left and right width, and all of the game balls located in the non-storage area part are the tank rail parts. A game machine characterized by being able to be guided to the side .

Images